Episode 210: How To Generate Leads With Pinterest Stories, Videos and Hashtags – with Laura Rike

Laura Rike SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab Laura’s Pinterest Toolkit

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Start to Scale Up System™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz

Summary:

Pinterest could be the sleeper tool you’ve been looking for to generate leads and grow your business. Pinterest is not a social media platform but a powerful tool that can increase website visits and bring you great new clients. But, few companies know how to use Pinterest. This episode covers the 101 of how to use Pinterest stories, videos, hashtags and more.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Understand how to use Pinterest stories 
  2. Have a starting plan to use Pinterest
  3. Understand the 101 of how to get started

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 
Follow us on Clubhouse App: @aprilbeach
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hey everybody. Welcome back to episode number 210 on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. Thanks so much for tuning in today. Happy January, 2021. We obviously just finished commitment week 2021 for entrepreneurs and small business owners.

 

And we had our fourth podcast anniversary birthday last week. So first of all, great way to kick off 2021. Thank you so much for being a listener of this show for the last four years and keeping us a top of the charts for business development online for entrepreneurs. We love you guys. If you haven’t had a chance to yet, please cruise over and leave us a review on Apple podcasts,

 

or just simply share this podcast from your Spotify up to your Instagram stories, or share this on LinkedIn. We appreciate you spreading the word about this show and just honestly how awesome you guys are as listeners. I get direct messages from many of you on Instagram and on LinkedIn, and just appreciate them so much. So we’re kicking off our fourth year with more proven business trainings that you can take to the bank.

 

We are known for giving you business steps and strategies that coaches charge thousands of dollars for. And it’s all totally proven. I’ve been coaching entrepreneurs for 24 years and the guests that also come on the show are proven experts in their space. So I’m so glad to turn you over to another guest expert on today’s show. We’re talking about how to generate leads with Pinterest stories,

 

videos, and hashtags. And let me give you a quick little backstory. I don’t do Pinterest. I’m not the Pinterest kind of girl whatsoever from a business strategy standpoint though. I definitely want to be where our clients are in where it’s a great place for our company to be, which is called the sweet life company for people to access our resources in the content that we distribute here on the podcast.

 

And so last year we got on Pinterest. We recorded a show about Pinterest with a guest expert, and my team quickly got to work implementing all those steps in our Pinterest engagement grew by something crazy. It was like 813%, which could be two things. Number one, it could show you how terrible we were at Pinterest before. So, you know,

 

there’s only way only one way to go is up or the strategies once are implemented with Pinterest. You can see almost instant results when you’re using Pinterest correctly. But with that being said full transparency, I still am not great at Pinterest. I’m grateful to have a team that does Pinterest. I’m not really on Pinterest. And so as an entrepreneur, I had a lot of questions for our expert today on,

 

you know, really who should be on Pinterest? What can you do on there? And especially all the new Pinterest stories feature. So on today’s show, we are talking to you guys about the fact that Pinterest could be that sleeper tool that you’ve been looking for to generate leads and grow your business. It’s not a social media platform. We’ll talk about that in today’s show,

 

but it’s really a great way to get eyes on your business and have people land on your website and increase your website, traffic and therefore generating leads. But honestly not a lot of companies are still leveraging Pinterest really well. So inter today’s expert, Laura rag is in the house today and she’s at Pinterest powerhouse who helps high performing business owners, content, creators,

 

and influencers grow profitability the right way with sustainable systems using Pinterest. She’s helped clients and students bring in over $50,000 in monthly revenue with her strategies. I mean, she’s really rad. You guys are gonna love her. And she’s been featured as a guest on podcasts like tailwind, ultimate marketer, twin cities, collective, and small business revival. And Laura lives in Minnesota with her family.

 

And she can be found@laurareich.com and we’ll of course, make sure all the links and everything we’re talking about in today’s show are going to be available for you guys in the show notes. If you’re new here then just so you know, you can find all the show notes and all the bonuses that we deliver with this podcast, by going to Sweetlife co.com, simply click on podcast,

 

and then you can click on the podcast number, or you can just type in the number of the podcast in our search bar. This is episode number 210. So welcome here to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast. And just a little bit of housekeeping before we dive into today’s show, if you haven’t yet held your seat or joined the early registration waitlist for my,

 

your signature offer masterclass, that is coming in February. So now is the time to get on that wait list. It’s a two half day intensive, so not two and a half days, but it’s two half day intensive that I’m going to be teaching in the middle of February. And this is going to teach you how to extract your own intellectual property.

 

Take a look at all the assets and all the great things you’ve created, and we are going to together build your signature program. Course mastermind, membership, whatever the business model of that is, we’re going to help you extract it all and create it into a signature offer. That’s perfect. Should give you the results that you want. Make sure that you’re joining that early registration list by cruising over to signature offer.com.

 

Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s podcast training.<inaudible> I’m super excited to be here with Laura Reich. And I will say that we did reschedule this episode because we’re both moms and that is what happens in our life. And Laura, you guys have to see this behind the scenes, this video, make sure you go to our YouTube channel and to our Pinterest,

 

there’ll be videos on there because she is glowing because she is beautifully eight months pregnant. And we had to make sure we recorded this show before baby, right. Number three, arrived. So we’re, we’re getting this out of here for you, Laura, welcome to the show. Thanks so much to everybody. A little bit about yourself. Yeah, for sure.

 

I thank you so much for having me. I am a mom of two boys with a girl on the way. So we are so super excited over here in this neck of the woods. And I am a VA gone rogue is what I call myself. So I used to try to do all the things and with a family that doesn’t work. So I picked one thing I love,

 

which happens to be Pinterest and design. And I have been going hard at that ever since and just love it. That’s awesome. Okay. And what is your URL? So people can find you, even though we’ll put all this in the show notes for you. Yeah, of course. It’s just Laura wrike.com. So it’s L a U R a R I K e.com.

 

Awesome. Okay. So today on the show I have a million Pinterest questions. So we had Melanie fountain on the show a while ago, almost a year ago, really diving into Pinterest Pinterest marketing. It was a great episode. I will say, as a case study, we took those like Pinterest one Oh one steps, and we tried them. And as a company,

 

we had crazy results. It was like we went from being nowhere on Pinterest, having random pins to, you know, having thousands and thousands of impressions. And it was like an 813% increase with applying some basic steps. And so I am a believer in Pinterest now, but I will also say I am completely still Pinterest illiterate because my, my team does it.

 

And I get questions all the time from business owners about, you know, still, should I be using this? What is this look like? What can Pinterest really do? And so today’s show is all about kind of dissecting some of those high-level business questions. So our listeners can, first of all, determine whether or not they should be in Pinterest.

 

So number one is this worth your time, number two, how to get started and you have a toolkit for people to get started, which I wish that we had had in the beginning, I will say for sure, you know, really what is this toolkit? How do we get started with this? But there’s so many things kind of spinning around with Pinterest.

 

So let’s kind of start, I would say, spinning around in my head with Pinterest. So let’s go ahead and just start with question number one. How does Pinterest rack up and compare to other social media outlets such as Instagram or LinkedIn? Yeah, for sure. Really the biggest difference is it’s not a social media platform like Instagram or LinkedIn. LinkedIn is been known for the more professional type connections and Instagram.

 

You have conversations and the comments and things like that. Pinterest really does not focus there. They really focus on you putting in the conversation into the copy and making sure that you have the keywords there so that people can find you when they find you. Then they read that conversation and they click through to the destination, which is where you can take it from there.

 

So it’s more search based and it’s more top of funnel based because you can utilize Pinterest to send it where those conversations are happening right now and bring in a wider audience over there. Okay, fascinating. So it’s SEO, it’s search engine. It’s a way to take a conversation and become the top of that question for you. Is Pinterest owned by Google or is it a Google product or something of that sort?

 

It is not, no, it’s separate. It actually plays off of Google’s domain authority and their own domain authority. So when you have your website and then you have a Pinterest profile or business account, right, you’re going to get more domain authority with your profile on Pinterest than you are your own website. Unless, I mean, you’re some super big wig,

 

but it has been around forever. Right? But like my website is not going to have as much domain authority as Pinterest. And so I really use that and play off of their authority to be able to bring people to my website. Very cool. Okay. So what businesses should be there. And so let me rephrase that question. You know, obviously who should be on Pinterest,

 

but as a business strategist, my brain works the other way, what buyers are on Pinterest, like who is actually looking for content to increase maybe their performance, their profit, their business ability or whatever it is. You know, we have a lot of marketing coaches, brand new coaches, video coaches, health coaches, a lot of physicians, a lot of attorneys and even a lot of CPAs that listened to our podcast are their buyers.

 

Absolutely. So there’s kind of two different ways that I tackle that for people. One, I am a Pinterest junkie, right. It’s my jam. So I’m always going to tell you, yes, there are buyers there to give you kind of an unbiased opinion. I tell everybody to go to the platform type in something that your buyers would be searching for,

 

right? Like what is the problem or the pain point that they are having and how would they find you? Other places on Google, on Facebook? Like what are they looking for? And if what pulls up underneath that search is offering or information or education that you can provide to them because you know how to do that as well. Then 1000000%, that’s where you should be listed because you’re missing that opportunity.

 

The other thing that I like to talk to people about is really when you’re thinking about buyers, like where are they? Right. Cause everybody has a different stage. And so we talked about this for a second too. Like, it might not be that they’re a startup or they’re established or whatever, but where do they aspire to be? So if they are someone who is earning three figures right now,

 

they’re not going to be looking for how to earn three figures on Pinterest. They’re going to be looking at things like how to grow your email list to earn five figure months. And that’s because they aspire to be in that position. So that’s also something that you need to kind of reverse engineer and think, okay, is my buyer talking to where they’re at right now?

 

Are they aspiring to be a five figure person? Are they aspiring to maybe lead a life where it’s freedom, right? And so they have more time in their day or their moms or whatever. And that’s really how you want to address it too, when you’re going about it that way too. So smart. Yes. And you know, there are always,

 

people want to hang out just you and I do too. We want to hang out with people that are just slightly ahead of where we are. Right? Those are, those are the best people that are going to hold our hand and grab us to the next level. And that totally makes sense that that’s the same thing people will be looking for on Pinterest as well.

 

How often should people post let’s actually talk about the content that should be posted on Pinterest? What is like the baseline, if you’re going to get started, this is how often you post. This is what it really looks like. Yeah. So it used to be an everything that I’m going to tell you guys here is how I handle it, right?

 

So I am not saying this is the end all be all. I’m not saying this is a hard and fast rule. You have to do it this way. This is what I’ve implemented for myself and my clients and my course members and things like that, where they see the results. So one of the things that I really tell people is it used to be pin 20 to 30 to 40 different times a day,

 

and you would pin your stuff and other people’s stuff. And really that’s not necessarily required anymore. What I teach is that you need to be consistent on the platform. So if you’re someone that’s just starting out and maybe you don’t have a ton of content out there, which I can try to prove you wrong, because there are multiple places that I can find content you have already posted online that can work for this.

 

But if you’re thinking content in terms of like landing page or sales page or blog posts, and you’re feeling like you don’t have a ton, then start at one or two pins a day, right? Even if it’s a time constraint, like how do I create all these pin designs? Start at one to two pins a day, then start to work your way up.

 

If you’re someone that’s been blogging or you have tons of an audience, and you’re looking to really expand on that and you know that you have tons of content, then start hire. We did a case study actually on my website. It showed, even though they had a smaller audience and the other account had a larger audience, one pinned, I think it was like seven times a day.

 

And the other one pin 21 times a day, they still saw the same incremental increases on their own accounts because they were being consistent. And it was the quality over how often they were posting that gave them that feedback to know that that was beneficial. Wow. That’s so awesome. That’s super encouraging. I know because our listeners are like thinking like, Oh shit,

 

20 times a day. Like, how am I going to ever do that? Like that is not ever going to happen. And so that that’s super cool to look at the case study and the stats and, and really just the incremental growth that’s happening with. What’s being posted now, little tangent, what software do you recommend that people use to manage their Pinterest?

 

So I go back and forth on this. I personally use tailwind. I love them dearly because they have tailwind tribes. And that’s really like a community-based where you’re sharing ideas together. And then, I mean, sharing other people’s ideas and really having that community type feel like you would on social media. The problem with me only telling you to pick one platform that I see though,

 

is it’s not a good fit for everybody all the time. So if you’re out there and you’re like, I’ve tried tailwind, it doesn’t work for me. I apologize that it didn’t work for you. I love them. They are amazing. But what I urge you to do is go to Pinterest and make sure that the scheduler you’re using, whether it’s ladder,

 

whether it’s meet Edgar or whatever is a Pinterest approved platform. Because if it’s not, you set yourself up for possibly getting marked as spam or even shut down because they might not be following Pinterest best practices. Wow. Okay. I know that is such a fear. I’m so glad you said that because people would never know, know to even look, they’ll just think,

 

Oh, well, because this platform offers it does works. Great. I’ll just take this one, but it is so important with not just Pinterest, all the different social media platforms that whatever schedule are you using does it does abide by their regulations. So thank you for that. And we’ll go ahead and make sure we leave some resources so that you guys can find Laura.

 

And then also to some of the software tools in the show notes of this show. So we’re not going to totally leave you all hanging out there with that. So this week I was on Pinterest and I have a confession to make. I am never on Pinterest. I’m not a Pinterest girl. I’m just not okay. And so this week I thought,

 

okay, I’m going to go ahead and post a video. I think I had posted something to a LinkedIn story downloaded, like the little five second video. And then I, you know, distributed it or long all of our, you know, Instagram and LinkedIn story channels. And then I’m like, well just sitting there on this little five second video,

 

why don’t I just try to put it on Pinterest? And so I went on there, not knowing even that Pinterest had stories, I was just going to post it like as a little video on there and, you know, boom, I’m sure everybody who’s listening to. This is like, yeah, duh, April Pinterest is had stories for a while.

 

You know, but to me that was, I was like, what, it’s another thing with this story. So what are Pinterest stories? What should be posted there? What is the purpose of a Pinterest story and how can they be leveraged in the business? Yeah, for sure. So it’s actually not something that’s entirely like completely past you, right?

 

So it is new. So don’t worry about that. Some people have had it around for a little while, but it has now opened up to more people. And so a lot of people are seeing the get early access symbol when they’re locking in, there are two sides of it, which is awesome. One side is the, I really feel like Pinterest is stepping up their game in terms of providing an opportunity for content creators,

 

to be able to tell a story better, to be able to educate more. Because when you think about it, you only have one graphic and you can only have so much on that one image to try to tell that story and capture their attention. So the purpose of stories right now is to be able to have multiple images so that they can kind of tap through.

 

And it’s kind of like a slideshow. I teach people to do more of like step-by-step, or this is what I’m working through or behind the scenes, or like more of that conversation visually in those stories. The only downfall to stories that I see currently, which I’m hoping they open up in the future is it’s not clickable to an actual landing page. So you wouldn’t use it like you do a static image because you can’t get them to use that referral traffic in our research that we’ve done in the past few months,

 

though, it really does help increase the brand awareness and authority on your account. So you will see that if you are using it, to teach people things and to educate them and to provide more information for them at the end, Pinterest puts on a follow button so they can start following you on Pinterest. And it’s really bringing in that authority from that platform.

 

And then we’ve also seen the link clicks and the traffic and the leads increase on the other things that we’ve been consistently putting out there because of the help with the stories. Okay. Totally makes sense. And leads me to, first of all, say, that means I really failed on my first story. Cause I just uploaded that one video and I was like,

 

wow, they want me to share more. I don’t have any more right now. All right. What the hell? I’m just going to upload this one video. So first of all, how people find your stories if they’re not already following you, does Pinterest use hashtags? Yeah. So Pinterest uses hashtags. This is one of those controversial type things though.

 

Pinterest, a while ago said no hashtags. Then they said, yes, hashtags. Now they’re saying don’t use them a ton. So my philosophy has always been when they’re, when they opened up hashtags, don’t use them to keyword stuff. Use them within a sentence that you have put into the description, like use up your entire 500 character limit. And then if you have room and you can’t put on a whole,

 

a full another sentence in there, but there’s a hashtag or a phrase that still is relevant to what you’re sharing, then use it as a hashtag. Right. And just kind of take it that way. I’ve never done more than like three on a pin at most. So I don’t really see it being a problem. As long as you use it,

 

that way, those that have gone gung ho or followed the ups and downs of the hashtag or no hashtag I think are starting to not see the best results. The hashtags are still searchable, so you can still find them in search. So it really just depends on, on what placement you have for them in the description. So if your pin is about how to create a content marketing strategy,

 

and it’s like a download of a calendar or graphic, you’re not going to use a hashtag girl boss. I hate that hashtag by the way, every girl listening to the show is going to hate me for saying that I can’t stand that term. Yeah, no, it’s too general. Yeah. Right, right. You know what I mean? You’re going to put like content marketing or content calendar or a social media calendar or something.

 

Yeah. So two that don’t do the girl boss. I’m not a huge fan of that either. I like the terms that actually are like leading me somewhere. Right. Like that seems anyway. So I would say if you’re talking about content marketing though, in the description, don’t waste your hashtag on hashtag content marketing, maybe do calendar download or calendar template or something like that.

 

So it’s still relevant, but it’s playing off of a different type of search that someone would do. Maybe they don’t know about the content marketing calendar, but they’re looking for calendar templates or some sort of business template or something like that. That way. Then you have the conversation, it still flows. You’ve got the keywords in the description. And then you just add in a couple of those hashtags that are still keywords,

 

people would search for, but you couldn’t put it into the sentence flow that you were creating. All right. I got you girl. That totally makes sense. So with our stories, can you add hashtags? I kind of went back to that question. How did, how do people find my stories if they aren’t following me? Stories are still there like a collaboration of pins.

 

So you get to put three or five or however many you want in there and you still get a description on each one. So it’s still going to be searchable. You still can put a couple of hashtags in there if they’re not already following you and they search for something, it’s going to show up in the feed, just like any of the other static pins or video pins.

 

So in terms of your video, you could have uploaded it just as a pin instead of a story. And it works the same way as a static pin. You do get a little bit more tagging capability in terms of topic, tagging for videos. Then you do a static pen. So you can also use the tags for keywords that you want to be found for.

 

And that increases the searchability as well. Okay. So let me make sure I understood this correctly. The stories are basically a collection of pins related to the same things, is that right? Yep. So if I have a static pain, can I like Instagram? When you have something in your feed, that’s a post, can I push that to story?

 

Like, can I push a static pin to story or is it a separate, complete way to post that It’s a separate, complete way to post that you can repost it? The only problem that I see by doing that though is Pinterest is very heavily encouraging people to do fresh content. So they will see that same static pin posted. And then again on your stories and they’ll consider that as like a spam duper kit.

 

Got it. Okay. I lied that. Wasn’t the last question before. Thank you listeners for bearing with me. I hope I’m not asking like questions that you all know the answers to. I really include this in this area. And so it was, I’m so glad to have you here, Laura. And so how long the stories stay in a story?

 

How long are they shown for So completely different than social media? They stay on there just like a Pinterest pin, unless you go and delete them, they will be on your profile. Awesome. Okay. That makes me really happy. Nothing bothers me more than posting a really great Instagram story that people only get to see for 24 hours. So that’s super awesome.

 

Thank you. I’m super excited about stories. Like I said, Kelly and JC on my team really create our Pinterest content and post that. So thank you. By the way, to those of you guys who have been following us on Pinterest it’s, it’s cool to see that and those interactions and things, but I’m totally personally Pinterest illiterate. So I’ve just have so many questions that I am not able to answer for our clients.

 

So I’m very excited about all this. Okay. So let’s chat a little bit about video pins. Now, what is the parameter around video pins? Are they all vertical? How long can they be? And are they clickable? Yeah, so they Do not all have to be vertical. I still suggest it because then you’re taking up more real estate on the feed.

 

I personally don’t want to go more than a minute to a minute and a half. I believe you can go longer. I think it’s like two or three minutes that you can go up to. I’m not a hundred percent positive because I stick on the lower end. And then what was your other question? That was my other question. Oh, it’s are they clickable?

 

Oh yeah. So they are not clickable unless they’re used for ads. They have been clickable in the past. Again, I’m not sure if that’s something that’s changing or updating because there have been a lot of changes in the past, like four to six months on the platform, but they really do help with that growth of the account as well. When we’ve seen a lot of people come to us and say,

 

you know, I had a huge spike in October and now it’s December and everything’s dropping and I don’t know what to do. They post a couple video pins, they do a story pin and they’re back up again. Right. And they’re doing that consistently. I’m not going out there and telling everybody to post one and you’re going to be like woo through the roof and like,

 

awesome. But like, if you keep doing that, you’re going to keep seeing the results go up and back in the direction that you want them to go. Love that. Love that. Thank you so much. I have my million of Pinterest notes here and, and Laura, the couple of things. So for our listeners who want to get started with Pinterest,

 

I will say in full transparency, even though I’m not the one that does it, I’m really grateful for an amazing team that manages our Pinterest there. We really have seen amazing results and growth from using Pinterest as a platform with our audience. So I will say that from what I I’ll just say, if you guys are considering using Pinterest, definitely have a strategy behind it.

 

And really what I would like is to direct people towards some steps to get started. Nobody wants to recreate the wheel and you have a Pinterest like toolbox a toolkit it’s really cheap. It’s like 37 bucks or something that people can get started with what is inside that toolkit and what can people expect with that? Yeah, for sure. So the toolkit is really put together for anybody that needs that simple strategy,

 

right? That’s actually gonna help them convert on the platform. And so it’s easy. We provide different templates for them, whether they’re static, pen templates, video template, story templates. I have an awesome keyword swipe file in there too. So I’ve gone through over 700 different type of niche, specific keywords and hashtags in this swipe file. And the cool thing is,

 

is we constantly update that. So the swipe file for fun stats has actually brought in over $33,000 for clients and toolkit. So That’s been super fun. Yeah, That’d be good work. That’s so good. Talk about an ROI. Yeah. Tons of other stuff too. Like we have a call to action, swipe file a branding blueprint to help them really understand how to brand their pin images.

 

And then there’s some bonuses of course, like a custom dashboard for Google analytics and how to track and make sure you’re getting the ROI and stuff like that too. So Yeah, I mean, when we, when we got started and we started implementing what I was saying is so true, like if we had had a toolkit like this, we would have grabbed it in the second.

 

And so based on our listeners in our show, if you guys are thinking you want to get started with Pinterest, we’ll go ahead and make sure we leave a link to grab this toolkit in the show notes for this episode. So make sure you guys go over and grab this. I would recommend those of you guys that are listening to get started here.

 

It’s a low investment and it saves probably months and months of time and years of learning because you’re getting Laura’s wisdom for only $37. That’s crazy for those of you guys that are scaling your business. So for those of our listeners, you’re scaling your business. You have a team like me that you really just, you want to delegate this, you know,

 

you, you probably want to be on the platform. Maybe your team doesn’t know Pinterest. They aren’t experts. Then I am going to point them towards you, Laura, we’ll go ahead and make sure that we put these show notes and I would really consider like hiring Laura’s team out to manage your Pinterest for you or something like that. At least chatting with Laura on the phone.

 

I know she has a bunch of other stuff for you guys. So based on our listeners, I always try to give recommendations. So if you guys have ever gone through and taken our quiz to figure out what phase of business you’re in, I’m going to tell you exactly who needs to buy kind of what here, if you want to do this, if you’re in phase one or two,

 

then I would go with the toolkit. If you’re in phase three, four or five, then I would go with one of Laura’s other done for you services. If you don’t know what phase of business you’re in, go to sweet life code.com forward slash quiz. And you’re going to get a whole rundown based on where you are of your phase of business development,

 

and then we’ll direct you there. But for those of our listeners, most of our faithful listeners already know what phase of, of our start to scale up system they’re in. And so they know, so phase one or two, you guys are the toolkit people three, four or five, then really done for you services near you’re ready to scale. Thank you so much.

 

Yay. Love everything that you shared. My, my Pinterest entrepreneur IQ, just like totally leveled up three levels. I feel like awesome. And I can’t wait to, you know, for our team to like start implementing some of the stuff that we talked about on the show as well. So super appreciate your time. Congratulations on your new baby. When this airs he’ll be here and I’m so excited for you and we’ll make sure we leave all the show notes for everybody to get their hands on these things.

 

I will say you guys, honestly, Pinterest has been a real nice pleasant surprise. We’re not on Tech-Talk or anything. We’re not on Twitter. And Pinterest has been really awesome and powerful for us to grow our audience. So thanks for being on this show. Yeah. I love hearing that. And I mean, honestly, it is such a great platform.

 

I’m so glad that your team can help you with that. That’s absolutely amazing. And thank you so much for having me. Of course. Yes, of course. Thanks for being here. I’ll talk to you soon. Thanks. Awesome. Some show. Thank you so much for tuning in and sticking with me here with Laura at the time that we recorded this,

 

Laura was expecting, and now she is probably listening to this episode, holding her beautiful baby girl in her arms. And so we just really appreciate Laura’s time and making sure we were able to record this episode for you guys before she gave birth and went on her maternity leave in such great information, follow us. If you aren’t yet on Pinterest, you can find us at Sweetlife podcast and you can see some of the things that our team has been doing over the last year.

 

You can even see how our, even our branding and our usage of Pinterest tablets has evolved how we’re using Pinterest stories and how we’re using video. We’d love to connect with you there and follow you back. All right, you guys have an awesome day. Again, all the show notes can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. This is episode number two.

Episode 209: How To Get Started On Clubhouse: For Entrepreneurs – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Get Clubhouse room notes, highlights and tips for entrepreneurs. Even if you’re not on the app yet! Follow me on Clubhouse @aprilbeach
By Text: Text the word “clubhouse” to 805-254-0880 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs looking to create deeper relationships with clients, peers and mentors.

Summary:

Clubhouse is a new social media networking opportunity for entrepreneurs. It truly takes the box it’s placed around you from other platforms and allows you to create deep relationships, establish yourself as an expert, learn, gift, and grow. But you may just be hearing about Clubhouse or be on the app and not exactly sure how to use it. Though we are not clubhouse experts This short episode gives you the 101 on how to get started on clubhouse what to expect and great opportunities for entrepreneurs using this app. 

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know the first three things to do when you get on Clubhouse
  2. Understand why Clubhouse is so special
  3. Start to strategize your clubhouse funnel and company growth

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
Get Clubhouse room notes, highlights and tips for entrepreneurs. Even if you’re not on the app yet!
  • By Email: www.sweetlifeco.com/clubhouse 
  • By Text: Text the word “clubhouse” to 805-254-0880
Direct Links to Join My Upcoming Clubhouse Rooms 
 
Follow us on Clubhouse App: @aprilbeach
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. You guys Welcome to the Sweetlife life entrepreneur podcast. I’m April beach, and I am super excited about this episode for a couple of different reasons. First and foremost, it is our fourth podcast birthday.

 

So thank you so much. You’ve been tuning in for the last four years. We have dropped an episode faithfully every week. And those of you guys who’ve been longtime listeners. I mean, those are you guys around the podcast launch team. I appreciate you so much for being part of this show, making this show what it is today and sharing it with your friends.

 

Thank you. Thank you. Thank you. If you’re new to listening, it’s so great to meet you. This is a show where we are known for dropping some serious gems. Sometimes those that other companies and coaches charge thousands for a lot of our episodes come with bonuses that are so good. Like you can’t even believe they’re free. So cruise over to Sweetlife co.com,

 

click on the podcast to get all the goods. If you have never ever been there before today is a special episode. Not only because it’s our birthday. As a matter of fact, a little behind the scenes, I was going to do a real special birthday episode and you know, we’re going to do this whole shindig and it was going to be great,

 

but there’s something way more exciting than our fourth podcast birthday that I absolutely had to scrap the schedule. And that’s what we’re talking about today. Today, we are diving into all things, clubhouse the new clubhouse app, especially for entrepreneurs. And I’m going to share seven steps to get started on clubhouse. Before I do this, I need to have a little disclaimer here.

 

I am not a clubhouse expert. As a matter of fact, there’s probably somebody, many people who can speak to this way better than I’m going to do. But I have taken the time to lay out seven steps based on my experience or the last couple of weeks inside the clubhouse app, things that I have learned by following other people and just really things that I’ve gathered about being on this app.

 

So I’m sharing with you my experience and what I’ve learned, and guess what you know, what’s so cool about the new clubhouse app. Honestly, there aren’t any experts yet everybody is new, and that’s why I’m so excited to share today’s Sweetlife entrepreneurial podcast episode so that you can get on clubhouse. You can be a drop of a big bucket that this app I believe is going to make.

 

So let’s go ahead and start with the fundamentals here. So, you know, whether or not you’re in the right place and you should continue hanging out and listening to this episode with me, number one, who is, is episode four, this is for, and all phases of my start to scale up system. So if you don’t know what business phase you’re in,

 

you can very quickly go to sweet life co.com forward slash quiz. And you’re going to receive a segmentation based on your business phase and very specific, customized recommendations to grow and scale your business to the next level. This particular episode is for entrepreneurs in all phases of my system. Just if you’re a new listener, the reason why I did note that is because some of our episodes are just based on a specific phase in business.

 

And I note that phase in the beginning of every single podcast episode. So frankly, you don’t waste your time. If you’re hanging out here with me, I want to make sure that this is a valuable use of your time. And so I tag every episode based on the phase of business that that episode applies to this one, however, is for all phases.

 

So let’s go ahead and move to the next thing, who is this episode? Great for this episode is great for entrepreneurs looking to create deeper relationships with clients, peers, and mentors. If that is you keep listening. Now let’s go ahead and dive in a little bit here. Clubhouse is a new social media networking app and opportunity for entrepreneurs. It really truly takes the box out from around you that other social media platforms have created the limitations.

 

The restrictions in clubhouse enables you to create deep relationships, establish yourself as an expert. It also allows you to learn, gift other people with your knowledge and grow, but you may just be hearing about clubhouse and you’re not really sure if it’s exactly, you know, what you should be on or how to use it. And so in this short episode,

 

I’m going to give you the one-on-one on clubhouse, based on my experience, those experience of my colleagues and the people that I am following. So my mentors, so that you can get started on clubhouse fast and in the right way. And we’re going to also talk about actually how to get into the app as well. At the end of this episode,

 

you’ll know the first three things to do when you get on the app, but I’m actually giving you seven steps to actually onboard yourself onto the app. You’ll understand why clubhouse is so, so special. And you’re going to be able to start strategizing your clubhouse processes, what you’re doing on clubhouse personally. And of course professionally, because I’m a business coach and that’s what I talk about.

 

All right. So if you’re ready for that, let’s go ahead and dive into the seven steps to get started on clubhouse for entrepreneurs.<inaudible> Okay. So welcome to call the house. We help. That basically means that I know that not everybody’s on there yet. You may be listening to this show being like, what the heck, April? This is so not fair.

 

I am not on this app. So here are a couple, just one. Oh, about getting on the app. First of all, currently at the recording of this, something can change literally the next hour with this app. You guys, but at the recording of this, which is only a week before the show drops, I did, this is close to the time of the show dropping as I could.

 

It’s only available to iOS users. Those you guys that are on Android, you’re going to have to wait a little bit longer. I have zero details on that, but I just wanted to let you know that it’s only available to iOS users. If you are an iOS user, you can go and we have it in the show notes here, you can go download the clubhouse app and let’s go ahead and dive into step number one.

 

The very first thing that you do even before you’re on the app is you should create and save your username. Now, here are some tips that I have seen. And from what I’m learning about your clubhouse username, unlike on some other platforms where you would take it, the name of your brand or your business clubhouse is like a real deal, real relationship app.

 

So it’s best to make your username, your real name, or as close as you can get to it. So that’s step number one. When you reserve your username, you’re going to be put on a waiting list to get in the app. Some people are waiting weeks, maybe even months to get into this app. And I understand that it’s frustrate.

 

Keep listening, hang in there with me, listen to the rest of the show. Cause I’m going to tell you exactly what, what to do. Once you get on the app, you can cut to the front of the line and we do this by getting a sponsor. That is also, what’s so cool about the clubhouse app, but you kind of have to know somebody that knows somebody to get in there.

 

They have to have your phone number literally saved in their phone. So you don’t just kind of know them. You actually have to really know him. So I was waived to the front of the line. My experience was I went downloaded the clubhouse app, reserved my name. I am at April beach on clubhouse. They Kevin’s my name. I was really excited about that.

 

And I was immediately waved in by my sponsor. Brian Fanzo you guys might know him as I social fans on Instagram brands also been a guest here on the podcast and he’s one of my mentors that helps me to increase my speaking career. And so Brian immediately got an alert that I was trying to get in the app and he waved me to the front of the line.

 

He endorsed me in. So what happens now on my profile, his endorsement of me is always on the bottom of my profile in my bio, which is really, really cool. And that can lead to a whole nother conversation about who you should endorse, maybe who you should not endorse on clubhouse, but that’s just my story of how I got it.

 

Otherwise you can be invited in and skip the wait list. When somebody, you know, on the app is a member of a group, which we’ll talk about groups and clubs are clubs on the app and they can nominate you. So those are a couple of ways that you can actually cut to the front of the line and get on the app. Otherwise just keep waiting.

 

You’ll get on there soon enough and believe me, it is worth the wait. So step number one is creating your username. Make it your real name. Again. This is like a real deal app. Step number two is creating your bio. There are clubhouse rooms on how to create great clubhouse bios. You are welcome. If you’re already on clubhouse,

 

cruise over, check out my bio at April beach, say it’s perfect. I’m not a clubhouse bio expert, but it’s been working for me to connect with the people that I really want to connect with. So you’re welcome to steal what I’ve done there. Now, overall in your bio. I want you to know that clubhouse is very, very generous.

 

It gives you a great deal of space in writing room to really bullet point, what you do and be very intentional about who you can help and who you want to connect with. So in your bio, you should make it really clear what you do to the problem you solve in really your intent tensions. Why are you on clubhouse? What’s your intention for being there?

 

You might also want to share something unique and funny, maybe a little something like behind the scenes. Like you love to ride horses or like Brian Fanzo my sponsor has that. He’s like a pager wearing millennial. I mean, that’s funny like who even wears a Pedro at all anymore. Right? And so you might want to include some of those things.

 

It’s in the bio. One of the things that I understand is that your bio is also searchable. And so within the app, the first few lines in your bio carry a lot of weight. So currently if you search online business strategist, I will come up as the top of that search in clubhouse. That’s because in my bio, the very first three words,

 

bio our online business strategist. So that’s step number two, creating your bio step. Number three of getting started on clubhouse is connecting really, really. So the first version you should connect with is your sponsor. You should follow your sponsor back, okay. This is really keeping it raw. I cut somebody right to the front of the line, who I’ve known in business for a really long time.

 

And this person is not following me back. It’s just a courtesy, right? So follow your sponsor back now, with that being said, you can learn a lot from your sponsor. So follow your sponsor. And there’s a little bell next year sponsors name you’re going to want to turn on. That means you get a notification whenever your sponsor is talking,

 

go in and listen to those rooms that your sponsor is in. Go and listen and learn and be a sponge. The first part of connecting on club house is just sitting back kind of watching the flow of how it goes. It’s a really amazing way too. Honestly, you’re dive in head first into this. It’s not even like a Cannonball. If there was like an upside down Cannonball and that’s what happens.

 

You just are in here. And all of a sudden you’re in these places and people are talking, it’s like a whirlwind. So just chill, just sit there and just absorb and take as long as you need to, to do that. Bet, we’re going to talk about not taking too long and jumping in right away. The next thing you want to do is when you’re listening to somebody speak,

 

and I’m going to share with you exactly the breakdown of how you find those places, where people are speaking here in a sec. But when you’re listening to somebody who, somebody who is speaking, when you’re in a room is what it’s called. Look to the people, to your right, and look to the people to your left. What you going to see is people literally hanging out,

 

standing next to you in a room, listening to somebody, speak on stage. Now this is all on an app. It’s all on a screen. So the speakers are going to be at the top of your screen. The people that the speakers follow are going to be the next section down, and then the rest of the audience is going to be underneath that clubhouse.

 

We’ll probably change that up in some capacity in some way, I’ve heard some thoughts of other people on that, but currently the recording of this that’s the way it is. So look at the people standing next to you on your right and your left tap on their bio. Maybe give them a follow. If it’s something that really aligns with, you know,

 

what you want to connect with. And then the next step is connecting off the app. Clubhouse does not have any hyperlinks, your bio, your neighbor’s bio, nobody gets hyperlinks except for there’s two places that clubhouse currently links to you. And that is Twitter and Instagram. And this is a really powerful thing I will say in my 10 days, maybe 14 days now being on clubhouse,

 

my Instagram following has tripled because my clubhouse account is connected to my Instagram account. And so how people connect with you is through DMS is through relationships on Twitter and Instagram, because there really isn’t a way to connect except for within talking within the rooms in the clubhouse app itself. So just so you know, that’s how you connect with people off the app.

 

There’s a lot of strategy behind that. As far as building funnels, can’t get into in this episode, this is just your seven steps to get started, but I’m sure your wheels are spinning. Okay. So that’s step number three. Step number four is search and find. So in clubhouse just a few days ago, they just released the ability to search by topic.

 

They’ve done a really good job with this. And so you can actually search and get notifications on rooms. So discussion rooms that fall under those topics here is the only downfall that I see of that. So far, the only rooms or discussions that you’ll get notified of are currently those that are hosted by clubs. We’re going to talk about clubs here in a minute.

 

So if you search entrepreneurship where you search parenting or you search gardening or whatever, you’re only going to get notification of the discussions under those topics that are hosted by a club, not all the rooms. So if I were to launch a room on gardening, because I don’t yet have a clubhouse club, you would never get notification of that. So just part of being part of an app,

 

that’s in the beta process, but you can still search by topics that you want to learn from. Also, I would recommend that you search by topics that you want to lend to. So this is getting into a little bit of business strategy. If you are an expert, if you are an expert funnel builder, or you’re a Facebook ad strategist, or you’re a graphic designer search for the rooms,

 

obviously in your area of expertise, so that you may be able to lend some information to the host of that room, the moderators of that room and the listeners of that room, or frankly, just so you can up your skills and be even better at what you do. And then the next tip I have for you under search and find is search for totally random rooms too.

 

One of the cool things about clubhouse is there are starting to be rooms on everything. I came across an amazing room. It was an 80 HD room and it’s just for people like me that have trouble focusing. And the room is hosted where they work in sprints and everybody’s sitting there in the room together and the host puts on music and then everybody goes to work for a period of time.

 

And then everybody together like takes a break and has their distraction moment. It’s a great way to increase productivity. So those are some cool rooms happening inside clubhouse that are totally not business-related at all. In addition to that, I will tell you if you are a faith person, if you’re a believer, there are some amazing rooms. This morning, I was in a room hosted by Myron golden business building like kingdom business building.

 

There’s amazing prayer rooms, Bible study rooms, really for all religions. Those are just the ones that I’m in. And so very cool things that you can search that are totally not business-related at all. Like if you need prayer and you don’t want to go to your neighbor or your sister, you can go on clubhouse and you can raise your hand and say,

 

will you please pray for me? I mean, how amazing, Oh my gosh. Like the power of this is just so unbelievable. Okay. Sorry. I’ll get back on track. Step number five, navigating. This is kind of just a one about how to navigate the app. The very first resource I have for you, that is a place that you should be tapping into is clubhouse guide.com.

 

We have put a resource to that in the link of the show notes here, please make sure you go to clubhouse guide. It’s how to get started on clubhouse clubhouse. One Oh one clubhouse best practices, a lot of the black and white and the meat and potatoes of what I’m explaining here on the show. Although I’m just sharing it with you from my personal experience so far,

 

that’s where I want to direct you to. That’s always going to be updated on, you know, the really the one-on-one and navigating the platform. It’s clubhouse guide.com. So let’s talk about nag navigating the platform and some of the terminology. The first thing you need to know is that there is what’s called a hallway. You have your own unique curated hallway and the hallway is showing you rooms,

 

discussion rooms based on the topics of interest that the app determines you may want. Now, again, what determines what you want are the topics that you follow, but also the people that you follow. So when you get on the app, you’re going to see a hallway. It’s like a list of conversations happening right now. All you have to do is tap on any of those rooms.

 

You’re immediately put into the audience and you can listen and see if you want to stay. When you enter a room, you’re put on mute. So you don’t have to worry about it. You can just tap on there, do the dishes, you know, drive your kids in the car or be at the gym, whatever. So the first thing you need to know is a hallway.

 

The second navigation point is the events tab. The events tab is in the top of the app. It looks like a little calendar, and you’re going to see a couple of different options for you. First of all, they’re suggested events for you, all events. And then the third tab is your events. And we’re going to talk about those in a minute.

 

So clubhouse will suggest events and scheduled rooms. Events are rooms that are, prescheduled both rooms that are prescheduled by clubs and individuals that you may want to attend. You’re also going to receive notification. So anybody you follow when they start a room, or when they’re speaking on stage in a room, if you have notifications turned on for that person, clubhouse will notify you.

 

And they’ll say like, Hey, so if I’m speaking in a room and you follow me, clubhouse would be like, Hey, April’s talking over here on this room on blah, blah, blah. And you can immediately tap that notification and enter the room and start chatting with me. How cool is that? Step number three is following clubs. So clubhouse enables people to create clubs.

 

Now we’re going to be doing many podcasts on this. I’m sure this is a very, very new app. Again, it’s in beta testing. I am not a club owner, so I can’t speak to that yet. But what I can share with you is that you can apply to have your own club. It’s going to be like the new Facebook group.

 

Many of you listened to this podcast, you know, how much I load Facebook groups. So I’m really looking forward to an opportunity to create community on a different platform. So just clubhouse, you can apply to start your own club. The application process currently is very backed up, but when you get approval for your club, then you can invite club members.

 

And when you have club members, they’re going to get notified every time your club hosts a room or an event. And so many other things, they can nominate other members to your club. I mean, it’s really an amazing way to grow your community. So one of the tips for you is if you want to start a club from what it is right now,

 

the way I understand is you need to host and schedule some individual rooms so that the app sees it. You’re not just like a flash in the pan that you’re really here. You’re really committed to build a longterm club with this app. You need to prove it to them. And how cool is that? It’s not like anybody can just start a group,

 

right? You have to be in it to give and to serve and to win it. And so you have to apply for a club and you have to prove to the app that you are worthy of being there and hosting that club on their app. Now you can follow clubs as well at the bottom of each person’s bio. If you go to the bottom of my bio,

 

I follow a ton of clubs. And I’m, I’m a member of really a great deal of clubs, maybe too many. Cause I got club happy and in applied, cause I was so excited just to talk to all these people. But if you go to the bottom of my app, you can see the clubs that I am a member of or that I follow.

 

Honestly, I’m not really sure that delineation between that. I think they’re the ones, I’m the member of in the bottom again, see, I’m learning here and you can click on that club and you can follow the club. Once you followed the club, the club hosts can have an opportunity to invite you to join the club. So you can follow a club and you can join a club.

 

So two different ways to connect with clubs. And then again, we talked about creating your own club, go to clubhouse guide.com for more information on creating your own club, but you’ve got to prove it, that you’re worthy of that. And you’re, you’re ready to be a leader on this app in order to get approved. For that, I promise this is going to be a quick episode and dang,

 

I have more to say than I thought I’m just clearly. So like a kid in a candy store, excited about this app. Number six be you. Okay. So when you join a room, if you have a question, raise your hand and ask the question, the host or the moderator will bring you to the stage. When you get on the stage currently in the app,

 

you are un-muted. So please, please mute yourself because you’re basically going to be disrupting the whole conversation when you get on stage and maybe they’re not ready to have you speak just yet. So be patient when you get on stage, mute yourself, listen, wait for the moderator to say, Hey so-and-so did you have a question or something that you’d like to say?

 

And here is a second thing. It’s okay to be nervous. It is crazy. Some of the really big influencers and leaders that I’ve seen get onto the stage for the first time and their voice is a little shaky or frankly, they’re just like, I’m nervous. And why somebody said it really well. I forget who said this, otherwise I would so credit them.

 

Literally. It’s very true. Somebody said, it’s not that you’re nervous to speak, but I think that we all understand the gravity of what this app could do for our relationships and our business. I think that’s where the nerves come from. It’s having an opportunity to speak to people that you would probably otherwise not have a chance to connect with. As an example,

 

I have been honored to be on the stage and to invite influencers to my stage, such as Myron golden and so many others. And I would never be able to connect with these leaders. Otherwise I send them an email. Obviously I can’t get a cell phone number, you know, and these are people that I highly value and I want to learn from in clubhouse.

 

It’s okay to be nervous when you go on the stage, just ask your question. And one of the other tips I want to leave with you is don’t ask to speak unless you have something really valuable to say, you know, those people who like raise their hand because they just want to speak because they like to hear themselves talk. Don’t be that person on clubhouse.

 

Seriously. If you want, if you have something genuine that you want to contribute, if the host says, Hey, does anybody want to contribute or ask a question, do it, don’t hesitate, jump up there and do it, but definitely make sure that you’re being respectful of both the hosts and the moderators and everybody in the audience time based on what you’re going to say and just don’t be that weird fan person just be respectful.

 

So if you are invited on a stage or if you’re in a room, you’re going to look around, you’re going to see some really big name people in this space. They’re just people too. They’re just, they’re listening and talking and sharing in the conversation. And it is absolutely a beautiful place just to be authentic, build relationships, learn, give,

 

grow, and create amazing networking with other companies. And then the last tip I’ll leave you with step number seven is starting your own room. Dive in, create a room. I have literally been buried in Instagram DMS about people asking me questions about clubhouse or companies who want to work with me based on the rooms that I’ve hosted. And now what they know my area of specialty is from clubhouse.

 

Literally my calendar is totally full. Okay. That is because I dove in and I started a room. I didn’t know what I was doing. And I was like, Hey, you know what? This is my first room I started. It was about the podcast episode of the week. I was like, okay, Hey, cool. I already know that I’m talking about this on the podcast this week.

 

How cool would it be to start a room? That’s a conversation about the podcast. And so I started a room and it was just talking about five areas of focus for the upcoming year in your business. And that room grew and grew and grew and grew. And I invited people to the stage and I made people moderators with me. And there’s other strategies behind that and why I did that.

 

We can talk about it another episode. But the reality is, is that just start a room. You know, I was speaking to somebody of course, again and Instagram DMS, and she is starting a business in an area where, you know, she just needs to do a lot more market research. And so I suggested to her, start a room,

 

asking a question, asking, are there any XYZ experts out there or are there any people with this experience out there, come join my room and let’s talk about it. So she didn’t even have to be the expert of that room just because you hosted doesn’t mean you’re the expert, a great colleague of mine, Heather and Haven would we host a lot of rooms together.

 

Now started a room a week ago, week and a half ago on how to monetize virtual events. Very simply because she wanted to know how and that room grew to the largest room. We have coasted on clubhouse so far with amazing virtual event and speaking influencers coming to our stage. The whole experience frankly, is blowing my mind. As you can probably hear in my recording of this show.

 

So you don’t even have to be an expert. Just ask a question. You might say, Hey, does somebody want to co-work with me right now? Hey, is anybody else having trouble potty training their kid? I mean, it can be about anything. Dive in, start a room, get started on this app, building authentic relationships. Okay.

 

So I don’t think I was succinct as I wanted to be. I apologize for that. Let me recap. The seven steps to get started on clubhouse for entrepreneurs. Number one, go get your username. Hopefully you won’t have to wait too long to get in. Number two, create your bio number three. Connect that’s following your sponsors and intentionally connecting with people and making other networking connections on the app.

 

Number four, search and find the right topics, the right rooms, and totally random rooms. Just to see how they’re doing things. Number five, navigate the hallway. So make sure that you know how to tap into rooms, how to leave rooms quietly in how to follow clubs, be part of clubs and get more of the topics that you’re interested in listening to in your hallway.

 

Number six, be you. It’s cool. Just be you. You can show up in your pajamas. Nobody cares be you and number seven, dive on in. Okay. So in the show notes of this episode, which you can find by visiting sweet life podcast.com forward slash two zero nine, I have a ton of links for you. You are going to find obviously the link to download the clubhouse app.

 

You’re going to find the link to clubhouse guide.com and you are also going to get an opportunity to get notifications from me. Now, clubhouse gives a lot of notifications, so we kind of to create a work around for this. So if you want to know, when I’m chatting in a room, join me in a room to chat. And then all of the other amazing entrepreneurs that I moderate and cohost rooms with,

 

you can very simply go to sweet life co.com forward slash flub house. Let me say that again. Sweetlife co.com forward slash clubhouse. If you are not on clubhouse, go there. And I send a periodic notes about the rooms that we are in highlights from rooms, in other things that we have seen and experienced just being in this app in the early phases.

 

So if you want updates, room notes, highlights, amazing quotes. I have about 20 pages of just blow your mind quotes. And then you can get those things by going to Sweetlife co.com forward slash clubhouse, or you can text them word clubhouse to the number (805) 254-0880. All of those things are in the show notes. Also in the show notes, I have provided direct links to join my upcoming rooms.

 

So if you’re already on clubhouse, you can go to the show notes for this episode and you can click on the direct link to join my show. I hosted a show, not a show room. And so used to saying show with podcasts. I host weekly room every single Wednesday at 12 o’clock Eastern time. And they are business strategy sessions for entrepreneurs.

 

Very similar to the things we talk about here on the podcast, but you and I get to talk about about it and I get to help you and help you strategize and answer your immediate questions about the topics January 13th. If you’re listening to this show live, I am. Co-hosting a room on license in your content. So how to scale your business by licensing your content.

 

I’m co-hosting that room with a few different, amazing attorneys that are copyright attorneys, IP attorneys definitely join that room. If you’re thinking about scaling your business by licensing your content courses and other strategies, or frankly, you’re just wondering about it, January 20th, I’m hosting how to grow your six figure coaching business with podcast and PR and January 27th. I am hosting a room on how to create your methodology,

 

your process, and turn it into your signature offer. Those are all on Wednesdays at 12 o’clock Eastern time. I would love to chat with you in any of my rooms and literally there’s so many other awesome rooms. I can’t wait for you to jump in and join this app when you do make sure you follow me at April beach. And if you aren’t yet,

 

you can DM me on Instagram. I am at April beach life on Instagram, and I will send you a link, a direct link from IgG on how to get all hard clubhouse, insider notes, and links to join me in all these rooms. Ooh, as longer than I thought it was going to be so much for hanging out with me guys,

 

I got to get back to clubhouse. Yep. That’s pretty much what it’s like. I’m hosting a room tonight, a female entrepreneurs round table, and so excited to jump in and learn from some of these amazing men and women leaders. And I can’t wait to talk to you in there too. Again, the direct show notes for this episode can be found@sweetlife.com

 

Forward slash two zero nine. All right. Talk to you guys soon.

Episode 208: How Be A Peak Performer In Health, Wealth, and Relationships in 2021 – with Eric Partaker

208 Eric Partaker SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

The 3 Alarms, Free Digital Book and Training

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs and leaders in all phases of business who feel like you just can’t catch up, and you know there’s a better way to live. Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz

Summary:

To kick off the new year, I’ve brought Peak Performance Coach, Eric Partaker, on the show to help you get started on the right foot and make 2021 the year you become the most productive version of yourself in multiple areas of your life and business. Eric has worked with and led high-performing teams at McKinsey & Company, Skype, and Chilango. He is one of 300 people worldwide certified as a High Performance Coach, by the High Performance Institute. Over the last 20 years he has studied and modeled the traits and habits of the world’s most successful people, in order to help his teams and clients break through their barriers and reach their highest potential, in both their work and life.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. No longer waste time
  2. Have a strategy to root your identity in who you want to be (even before you get there)
  3. Stop being an amateur and become a pro

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 
Email Eric Partaker | eric@ericpartaker.com
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the SweetLife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome to 2021. The first show, and we are starting out with a major bang that is going to be a game-changer for you. I’m so excited to dive in and help you understand how to be a peak performer in your health,

 

wealth, and relationships this year and beyond with our guest expert, Eric partaker. So let’s chat about what we’re doing here and why this show is so special. You know, as entrepreneurs, as leaders, as human beings, we all want to operate at our highest level. We all want to be that person that we envisioned we would be right. But what happens is we get burned out.

 

We get stretched thin, and there are some things that just don’t balance out to equal the vision that you might’ve had for what you wanted your life and your company to look like. And so we’re going to dive into that and we’re going to start out with a powerful plan and strategies to really be a peak performer in your health, your wealth and your relationships in 2021.

 

And let me just tell you, this is not another piece of content or some other podcasts on how to become productive or how to set goals. No, no, no. Our guests today shared strategies that I have never ever heard before. These aren’t the same old, same old things. These things are game changers. You guys, if you watch our video episode of this,

 

it is totally me behind the scenes taking massive notes. The things that he was saying was just gold. And so this is an episode that is definitely not to miss for those of you that really want to operate at your highest level in 2021. And, and frankly take back control of your health, wealth, and relationships, which are all things that we have left behind struggling with this last year.

 

We all hope and pray. So let’s talk about, you know, really what you can expect out of this episode. In this episode, we’re talking with Eric and I’m going to give you a bio on him. This guy is super duper awesome. So we’re talking with Eric, who’s a peak performance coach and author of the bestselling book, the three alarms,

 

a simple system to transform your health, wealth, and relationships forever. And the information on this show, like I said, it’s not going to be the same old, same old. You’re going to discover powerful new ways to increase your productivity, deep root your identity in who you’re supposed to be. And you’re also going to understand how to become even stronger with each challenge that comes your way.

 

It’s really, really good stuff. You guys. So at the end of this episode, if you apply the strategies in here and the bonus, that’s going to be given to you here with this show, you’ll no longer waste time. You’ll have a, to root your identity and who you want to be, even if you’re not that person yet. And you’ll stop being an amateur and become a pro.

 

Now let’s introduce you to Eric partaker. Eric’s a CEO coach and mentor, author, and peak performance expert. He was named the CEO of the year in 2019 business excellence awards. One of the top 30 entrepreneurs in UK 35 and under by startups magazine and among Britain’s most disruptive entrepreneurs by the Telegraph, he’s advised fortune 50 CEOs while at McKinsey helped build Skype’s multi-billion dollar success story and has founded several businesses of his own.

 

He’s a certified peak performance coach and has also completed a coaching certification and apprenticeship with professor BJ Fogg who leads Stanford university’s behavior design lab told you this guys it’s just super rockstar. He continues research evidence-based studies in psychology, neuroscience, habit, change leadership and peak performance. And he is giving you a totally free digital copy of his book. You can cruise over to Sweetlife co.com.

 

This is episode number 208, and a link to download his book will be found in the show notes. So if you are really ready to make a change that is going to stick and your business and your work and your relationships so good. You guys let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.<inaudible> Alrighty. You guys, I’m so happy to be joined by Eric partaker here today,

 

and we’re talking to all about peak performance, peak performance, usually in the past, have you been listening to the show for a long time? We talk about peak performance with extreme and adventure sports. And as that relates to the company you’re building basically. So you can have more time to take off and play with your extreme inexpensive venture sports. But today we’re really talking about peak performance that comes before that something that is not discussed often enough in the entrepreneur space.

 

And that’s about really performing at your highest level all the way across the board, so that you have an opportunity to reap all those benefits and rewards. And Eric is in the house today, talking all about his new book and how you guys can get to this state of becoming a peak performer and doing this in your business. You can do it in your life.

 

Eric. Welcome. Thank you so much for taking the time to join us here on the Sweetlife podcast. Super glad to have you tell everybody a little bit about yourself. Yeah, thanks April. And thanks everyone for taking the time to listen. Yeah, I’ve, I’ve been obsessed with peak performance for over two decades, but well, first, definitely in the wrong way.

 

And then in a, in a much better way. So about 10 years ago, it was all, you know, work. It was hustle mentality, and that’s how I was for the whole first half of my career. You know, so a hundred plus hour work weeks at McKinsey and company and helping build up Skype before we sold it to eBay,

 

few of my own businesses. And you know, I’m on a plane. Start to feel unwell, Dr. On-board rushes over, takes my vital signs and says, we need to land the plane immediately. I think he’s having a heart attack 10 years ago, playing emergency lens, where to a small town in France, the runway shut down. They take me off into a waiting ambulance where they administer nitrates to open up the arteries and increase the blood flow to the heart.

 

And as the ambulance sped off to the local hospital, I looked up to the eyes of the French paramedic looking down at me and I said, please don’t let me die. I have a five-year-old son. I didn’t say, please don’t let me die. I need to clear my inbox. And you know, my point there is that as entrepreneurs we’re so into the hustle,

 

we’re so into, you know, what, what do we got to do next? And, and it can all go at any moment at any time. And what I said in that moment, it really truly changed my life because the next morning I woke up and I thought, you know, all of my success to date at that point had come at the price of my health and relationships.

 

I almost lost my life. And then the very first words out of my mouth had nothing to do even with my own life. But, you know, with my boy at the time, right, my two boys now, but at the time, my, my only son and then that just struck me as, okay, that’s the three legged stool.

 

That’s what peak performance means. You know, we need to perform at a peak level across our health, our wealth, our work as a wealth driver and our relationships. And when I say peak performance, I’m not meaning turning. Yeah, I don’t, I don’t mean like in a turn a person into a Ferrari, you know, I mean, close the gap between your current and best self across all the areas of life that matter most,

 

you know, on the health, you know, work and home front. That’s the mission that I’m on now that I’ve been on for the last 10 years. And my book, the three alarms is, is about that mission. And it’s about how I’ve, codafide it as if you want to reach your best on the health, wealth and relationship fronts,

 

you need to do it through IPA, like the beer, but better for you and the IPA standing for identity productivity and antifragility. Yeah. And thank you so much for sharing your story. You guys watch the videos of these, you know, any sort of story like that. I’m here, like tearing up behind the scenes, but I understand that there are so many people that are on their way to hit that point without what you’re talking about in this book and,

 

you know, praise God, you were able to come back and figure it out and, you know, share it with the rest of us and really be able to leverage this to the next level and come in here and step in and help entrepreneurs. And so this is a perfect episode before we were recording. I was thinking, I wonder, are we going to air this?

 

And this is a perfect one to kick off 2021, because some of the things that you’re talking about, you know, we all want 20, 21 to be different than 2020. And it wouldn’t be nice if we just woke up and the whole entire world that was glittering on January 1st and everything was perfect again. And, and, and it’s okay to want those things.

 

But what we know is that we need to have a plan regardless of what comes about. And that’s what you talk about here in your book. And I love that now you have worked with really high level executives and entrepreneurs and your work in the past and getting people results in this. And it has really been extraordinary. And so I’m super excited to dig into what we’re talking about on today’s show.

 

So you say how to become a peak performer with IPA identity productivity, and antifragility, let’s go ahead. Can you dive in a little bit, and let’s kind of dissect each one of these things. So our listeners have an idea of some immediate actions and some areas in their life that they can, you know, rebalance or correct, or take a look at and,

 

and make some adjustments. Can we dive into IPA and the identity first? Yeah, let’s do it all. Talk about each and a practical tool. And the book of, I give loads of practical tools, but we just give like one quick win takeaway for each, each section. And let’s go ahead and say this too. If I can just interrupt.

 

You also said, all of our listeners are going to get a free digital copy of your book and we will make sure that is a huge gift you guys, and we’ll make sure that the link to that is in the show notes for this show@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash two zero eight. So yeah. So let’s go ahead and dive in. Yeah. Cool. And,

 

and I just want to step back just super quickly once again, and say, you know, 20, 20, it was a challenging year. And part of what I’m trying to do with getting the message out around this book is to have it perfectly timed with making 20, 21, a rebound year making 20, 21 the year where you stepped back up to the plate,

 

right? Where you take things back up a level and you kind of dust things off and you say, all right, let’s go again. And IPA is the path forward. And, and one other thing to remember, my definition of peak performance is not turning you into a Ferrari. None of this is about achieving perfection. This is just about you showing up as your best self in the areas of life that matter most.

 

This is about you kind of gaining entry to what Abraham Maslow estimated was the 2% of people in the world who realize their full potential. So IPA for me is about gaining entry to that 2% club. So identity, identity, why don’t we start with identity? So the why here is because we cannot become a better version of ourselves now and going forward,

 

if we continue to be the person that we’ve always been, that doesn’t line up. So what got you here? Won’t get you there. You need to make a change. And entrepreneurs leaders, CEOs are very intentional when it comes to work, they get it. They know that I need to have envisioned. I need to model myself after that vision,

 

but they don’t bring that same intentionality often to their health and home, or you know, their, their health and relationships. So what I talk about in the book, the three alarms is how I decided, okay, what is the best version of me look like on each of those fronts? And that’s what I’d like everyone listening to do right now.

 

Just ha have a thing. If you were to give the best version of you, you at your best, a name on the health front, what would it be if you were to give the best version of you, a name or a phrase or a persona on the work front, what would it be? And if you were to do the same on the relationship or the home front,

 

what would it be? So I gave an example of what I’ve done with myself. So on the health front, it’s not me who goes to the gym in the morning, I’m a world fitness champion. That’s who goes to the gym in the morning. That’s the person who walks through the door. And when I’m in on, in a particular exercise and I get to the eighth rep,

 

and I’m not sure if I’m going to get to the 10th, a little voice goes off in my head and says, of course you will, because you’re a world fitness champion. And that’s all being driven by identity because behavior follows identity. When I take a Spider-Man costume and I put it on my seven-year-old Leo, I do not need to teach Leo what to do next.

 

He doesn’t need to go through Spider-Man training camp. I put the Spider-Man costume on and he starts shooting webs from his wrist, jumping around, making funny noises. Right? So what it really, all I’m trying to do here is to get everyone listening to, you know, remember that you’ve already done this. You did it as a kid. You picked an identity,

 

maybe when you were playing, you changed into that and it changed your behavior. Same concept. You’re just remembering back to something you used to do. Every time I go to the gym now I’m wonder woman, perfect world fitness champion. Now I have that on my phone as an alarm at 6:30 AM, I’ve changed the name of the alarm. And it says world fitness champion to prompt that intentionality.

 

Okay, because I’ve segmented my day into three parts and I’ve chosen basically a best self identity that will power each of the segments. And so 6:30 AM world fitness champion goes off. The next alarm on my phone goes off at 9:00 AM and it says, world’s best coach, am I the world’s best at all of these things? Of course not. But that’s the version of me.

 

That’s going to start the Workday. How does that version of me show up and behave in the world? You know, how decisive inspiring and reliable will I be for my clients? If I’m coming from the vantage point of the world’s best coach versus just Eric and at 6:30 PM, the game-changing alarm for me, we’re all different for me. This is a game changer.

 

It goes off and it says world’s best husband and father to prompt the, how would the world’s best husband and father walked through that door right now? That’s the power of intentionality, right? So I’ve chosen, what does best look like on the three areas of life that matter? Most, I queue it at a particular time of day, that would most benefit from being powered by that best self identity.

 

And I get three massive benefits. It brings intentionality into the day. It brings wise counsel, you know, into a moment, you know, okay, what should I say in response to this person? What should I do next? Well, what would the world’s best husband and father do? And number three, it prompts, reflection, because if I do lose my cool with my seven year old,

 

for example, I’m not perfect then because I had something so high to measure against, I feel like a real jerk afterwards. Right. And that’s good because that’s making the gap painfully obvious and it means that I get better and better at closing it. So that’s the identity piece I’m taking course millions of notes here. I’ve already named all of my different sections of my day and who I am.

 

So I just I’m appreciating this and eating it up. I’m a sponge here, loving this information. I love that identity too. And it’s so true. Like when along the lines did we forget who we believe that we are rather than, you know, what the world tells us. And so, and I, and I love that. And you’re so right about the fact that as entrepreneurs,

 

we are so apt to believe that before in our business, but maybe not so much in our health and our personal lives, those things for sure are not the same. Maybe it’s because money doesn’t drive it. And it’s not because they aren’t as important to us. Well, maybe the health at first, you know, so I think this is super awesome.

 

Loving this so far. So let’s talk about productivity, the identities, EEI, and in IPA, what do you do and what do you recommend as far as productivity and how does that, why did you choose productivity as part of your methodology for obtaining people? Yeah. Great question. So, okay. So context then, you know, setting. So first we start with,

 

well, who is it that we want to be? That’s the identity piece. So now we’re operating from the vantage point of our best self and the three areas of life that matter most. So what do we do now to make progress? Because we’re just awesome, but we’re standing still, right? And we need to progress. We need to climb the mountain now.

 

Right? And so we do that through action. So that’s why we talk about productivity because knowledge isn’t power anymore. These days I can Google anything and be knowledgeable about it. Within seconds. Knowledge is not where the game is played. It’s about taking consistent persistent deliberate action. That’s where the game is played. And that’s why we need to optimize ourselves for productivity,

 

because we don’t want to just be taking any action. We want to take the right action and most efficiently, so smart. So there’s loads I go into in the book and productivity. I actually, it’s a big thing that, although the IPA acronym is it’s only three letters I had to do productivity planning and productivity execution, because it’s about, you know,

 

plan, execute, plan execute. Right. Right. And I think before you go into it, you’re an expert in this. Did you realize that I know a lot of entrepreneurs that have the best laid plans, but then zero ability to execute. Is that why in your experience of dealing this, you know, entrepreneurs, we can think of these,

 

Oh, this is going to be the plan. We can even set the plan, lay the plan out the steps of the plan, reverse engineer, the plan, Gantt chart, the plan, whatever it is, but then actually doing it tends to be a lot harder. So is that because we all struggle in this? Yeah. Yeah. Well,

 

I was a chronic over planner. I would just plan, plan, plan, plan, plan. The other thing though, too, that I noticed with myself was that I was also a world-class procrastinator and may have something to do with the entrepreneurial mindset because of our tendency to dream and to, you know, think about, you know, big opportunities and the next big thing,

 

it’s almost like this, you know, proneness for distraction, right. Or at least it was for me. And so I had to transform myself from a chronic procrastinator to a super producer. And, you know, we won’t have time to go into all the productivity tools, but I want to drive home. One in particular that I think is mind blowing.

 

So the average person loses and this, this data, I first picked up, by the way from the book, the one thing, the average person under observation loses 28% of their Workday to multitasking and effectiveness. So the person thinks that they’re multitasking in an efficient way, but what they’re really doing is they’re doing what’s called task switching, going from one thing to the next,

 

very, very rapidly. And that leads to a 28% loss in the day, because rather than sticking with one thing, they’re jumping around. So when they get back to the thing that they originally intended to work on, they’ve lost their place. They have to retrace their steps at the regain, their momentum, all of this leads to lost time, 28% loss of a day.

 

Now the book just leaves the stat right there. And I thought, hang on a second. This is like not doing that stat justice. So I took that number and I said, well, let’s generously take off six weeks for vacation in a year. So let’s do 28% loss against 46 work weeks. That means that the average person is losing 13 weeks a year,

 

which is an entire calendar quarter. So of course you don’t feel productive. Of course you don’t feel like there’s not enough time for everything you’ve lost a whole quarter every year Because you aren’t productive. And because you would have lost all that time. I mean, you’re playing a game of basketball and you’re going against the competition. You get to the end of the third quarter and then news to you.

 

Somebody says, Oh, by the way, we’ve got to tell you, but you and the rest of your team had to sit out the fourth quarter. You’re like, huh. And you’re like, well, how do we even have a chance of winning then? And they’re like, Oh we don’t. Yeah. It’s. So if we extrapolate that across a 40 year career,

 

that means that the average person loses an entire decade. What could you do with an extra decade? That’s like two more careers potentially. Wow. So what’s the problem here? The problem is people just jumping around too much throughout the day that in their phone disturbed their, their focus and the concentration, having too many browser tabs, open notifications coming in left,

 

right and center all of these lures to kind of guide us off our path for peak performance, our path for realizing our full potential that’s the issue. And so what we have to combat all of that with is developing the power of single tasking, which is a bit of a lost art, especially nowadays with smartphones angle tasking is nothing more than making sure you stick with what you’re working on for a good chunk of time.

 

At least 30 minutes provided there’s 30 minutes of work to do. I like to shoot for, you know, 30 minute chunks throughout my day. And then I take a break after 30 minutes. And the way you can develop the habit of single tasking is by becoming a lawyer for a few weeks. And what I mean, what I read is that lawyers timesheet their days because otherwise they don’t know where to assign the client time.

 

And when I thought about that, I thought, well, if a lawyer can do this every single day as part of their career, then I could certainly should be able to manage it for like, you know, few weeks. So all I did was I had four columns activity start time, end time, total minutes. And I literally recorded every single task I did from the time I woke up to the time I went to bed kind of before and after work,

 

I was more like grouping stuff together. You know, it’s like getting ready for example. But once I started the Workday, it was everything. So working on presentation nine to nine, 13, nine, 13 to nine 17, LinkedIn nine and 17 to nine 20, you know, Google search nine 20 to nine 23, reheated coffee and check Twitter.

 

And the alarming thing that it revealed was just how much task switching was going on. On the first day that I did this, I had 77 entries in my Workday. Wow. As I was bouncing around unknowingly from one thing to the next. So when you do this, it does two things. One, it raises an unprecedented level of awareness in you in terms of where is my time actually going and how often,

 

you know, am I switching and bouncing around? And then two, it starts to become kind of painful when you have two for the third time, for example, on a day, right. Facebook 20. Right, Right, right. It’s really eye-opening. And I could see how that would be incredibly. Eye-opening really, really fast. And gosh,

 

I mean, I just think that there is so much last time, by the way, the one thing is one of my favorite books of all time. And we’ll make sure that the notes to that book as well are in the show notes for this show. And I think that one of the things that you’re saying here was really, really interesting, the art of single tasking.

 

So when we single task and chunk our time and block calendar, a block and tackle and do those things, how fast and how much more of an increased you see in productivity in your clients that you have do that. I mean, is that like instant results that they’re seeing when they actually change these are, what are your case studies working with clients who have,

 

who’ve really tried to apply this. Yeah, that’s a great question. So we’re not machines, we’re not robots. And so what that means is that we can’t actually reclaim the entire 28% and then that may lead you to believe that, okay. So then I can’t actually get the full quarter back. That’s actually not true because when you start to develop your ability to focus,

 

it also speeds up your output for the 72%. That wasn’t an issue anyway. Right. So what I see is, well, beyond then the 28% capture, it’s almost like people are becoming twice as productive as they previously were and that’s life changing, right? Because you’re producing more with the time you have. And that suddenly gives you the time that you are yearning for when it comes to your health and your relationships.

 

And yeah, it’s been life-changing for me to personally, because I just work, you know, with an extreme sense of focus I’m intensely on and then intensely off. And there’s no real anxiety during my Workday. There’s so much to be said to this. Like you were saying, I mean, it’s, you guys are just going to be super excited when you get a chance to experience Eric’s book with that being said again,

 

there’s so many things we could talk about, but moving on to the anti-fragility, let’s talk about that and why that is so important. We were talking about it a little bit behind the scenes before we started recording. What exactly is that to our listeners who are just wondering, I don’t even know how to define that necessarily in my life. Yeah. Okay.

 

So let’s play a game. Let’s say that you are a shipping container, you know, and my question would be, well, what does the container or the crate, you know, say on the side, if you’re that crate, what’s your label, is it fragile? And then that means you get hit a couple of times you break. And then my question to you would be,

 

well, what’s the opposite of being fragile. And then you’ll say probably something like robust, you know, or strong, robust, and strong synonyms, you know? So that just means that, okay, I can kick you a few more times and eventually you break and then you might say, no, no, no, no, no, no,

 

no, no, no. I’m resilient. Okay. Well, by definition, that means that we can keep hitting you and you’ll absorb the shock and you’ll stay the same. It’s like, Oh, okay, well that’s pretty good. Enter antifragile. The more we kick you, the stronger the crate becomes, wow. That’s where we want to be.

 

Now people, when they first hear this say, okay, wishful thinking, that’s like, you know something in a Marvel movie, that’s, that’s not reality, but then you’re dead wrong because every single person, your body is a perfect temple for anti-fragility. You stress a muscle and it causes it to grow. You expose the body to germs and bacteria.

 

It builds the immune system. You expose tissues to, you know, small doses of, you know, ultra by light. And it actually generates vitamin D you’re already, anti-fragile physiologically your body’s already doing it without you even realizing it. So it’s hard coded in your DNA. You just need to get what’s happening in your body, up into your head.

 

And so anti-fragility is about realizing that the gym, where you go and you train doesn’t need to just be there in the gym. You can turn life into one massive training camp. So every moment of adversity, challenge, frustration, disappointment thing, that doesn’t go your way. It’s nothing more than a personal trainer in the gym of life, walking up to you and saying,

 

Hey, here’s a Dumbo. Do you want to curl it? And you can either grab the dumbbell, curl it, complete the repetition and grow stronger as a result. Or you can wimp out and walk out of the gym. So it’s up to you. And the antifragile mentality says, yeah, I’ll take that dumbbell. Yeah. And if you’re in an argument with somebody,

 

for example, and now they escalate the argument, all that’s happening there is that they’re saying here here’s a heavier Dumbo and you could walk away or you could stay there and you can curl it with your best self. So loads of different ways of building this mentally, you know, anti-fragility, you know, that I cover in the book, but probably the most powerful,

 

I mean, there’s so I have so many favorites, so hard to choose. Okay, I’ll go with this one. If you can embrace this, just this, if you forget everything else I’ve just said, and if you just embrace this one thing, even if you forget to pick up the free digital copy of the book, that’s fine, but just don’t miss this point.

 

And that’s in 2021. Do you want to remain amateur in life or do you want to turn pro let’s start with an amateur. So the first half of my career, I let an amateur existence by that I made feeling for me, preceded action. I needed feel like doing things in order to do them. So feeling generated action. That’s how an amateur lives their life.

 

And the amateur will get amateur. Results a pro knows that it’s action that generates feeling the equation is literally flipped, which means they don’t need to feel like doing something in order to take action. They take action, whether they feel like it or not. And in fact, when you really upgrade this kind of way of being or mentality, the less you feel like doing something,

 

the more discomfort it presents you, the more you step into it, the more you say it’s there for in that direction. I must step, you know, it’s sorta like elite warriors are trained to run towards the sound of gunfire, not a way. Right? And so turning pro versus remaining an amateur, what do you want 20, 21 to be?

 

And where have you been an amateur in life? And where can you develop a professional mentality and know that action generates feelings, not the other way around. Wow. Eric, I’ve never heard it explained as well as you just explained that there, thank you so much. I mean, that was just, I mean, the anti-fragility part in one of the things you said,

 

let me look back at my notes here. So I have it, is that the resilience you bounce off and stay the same. And so many you hear that talked about so often like, Oh my gosh, well, you need to be resilient and just bounce around and just pop off this. But what we’re talking about is, yeah, resilience keeps you exactly where you were before you don’t go forward.

 

You don’t go backwards. You just bounce off and you remain the same in the way that you’ve just explained that with actually changing with actually becoming stronger from each one of the blows, the pushes, the drops, whatever it is super amazing. And I love everything that you said, and I know our listeners are just really going to get a ton out of this.

 

Not only that that’s so generous of you to give away a digital copy of your book and for your time here on the show, this is the perfect show. So Jeff Goins introduced us. Thank you, Jeff, for bringing Eric here on the show. Jeff was a guest on the show. Oh my gosh. Like almost four years ago now in the very beginning,

 

when we first launched and he was right on about you being perfect for our audience and your message that you wanted to share. And I’m so glad that you’re here and this is exactly what we were looking for for honestly, for me personally, to kick off 2021, you know, we have guests on the show. I learned so much from you and really wanting to find somebody that was saying exactly what I selfishly personally needed to hear right now is an entrepreneur and a mother and a leader.

 

And what I would consider was a peak performer up until 2020. And now I just feel like I have been resilient and I have not necessarily gotten stronger through this. And so I will look at myself very, very closely after today’s episode. And I’m super excited to dive in more to the work that you’re doing and really appreciate your time on this show.

 

And so tell everybody how they find you. I’m really into reading print copies. I love holding a book in my hands, how they can experience your work, where you hang out when you are being incredibly focused and hanging out online, not all the time and how they can work with you when they’re ready to really take their business and their life to the next level.

 

Yeah. I just have to say April that, you know, when you say, wow, I really needed this personally. Hey, me too. You know, the reason that I’ve done all of this is not because I wasn’t born thinking this way. I had to become an expert about all this stuff because I really needed it. I needed to become anti-fragile.

 

I needed to become more productive. I needed to start living more intentionally. So we’re all on the same boat on that. So I just wanted to say that. So, okay. The book, if you like print copies of the book, please head over to Amazon, amazon.com, amazon.co.uk. I’m based here in the, in London, in the United Kingdom,

 

but either Amazon will have the book. If you head over to my website at Erik, Erik with a C Eric partaker, just like it sounds partaker.com got a free digital copy of the book waiting for you there. And I have some free three-part video training with worksheets as well, waiting for you there that will help you further embed some of the concepts in the book I’m coming out with an entire video course that I’m filming actually this week,

 

like over 40 different modules, all about IPA, which will be available on the website by the time this airs. And then if you’re listening and you’re like, look, I think I benefit from even just a chat, a single kind of peak performance insight session, which, which I run, you know, on a free basis with people, or if you’re like,

 

I need a coach or any of that, then just get in touch via the website. And, you know, we can have a chat, basically. I’m looking after, at the moment, 24 CEOs, entrepreneurs, other coaches, and they’re running everything from billion dollar businesses down to pre-revenue, you know, they’re just getting their funds raised to start their business,

 

but they all share the same quest. They want to close the gap between their current and best self. They want to reach their full potential and they want to do it. Multidimensionally and then, you know, my email, Eric, Eric partaker.com. So there you go, Thank you so much and we’ll make sure all those links are in the show notes.

 

And thank you so much for your time. I am super stoked to kick off 2021 with you, Eric and great to be connected with you. Thank you.<inaudible> Right. And that is a wrap for episode number 208 here at the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. You can find all of the show notes and the digital copy of the book that Eric’s promised you here on today’s show by visiting Sweetlife co.com

 

simply click on podcast. And this is episode number 208. And for those of you guys that are really ready to kick off this year with a bang, make sure to join us for commitment week 2021. It is coming up on January the 11th, totally free to join, and we are going to be covering five different aspects to reset and refocus your business for 2021.

 

It’ll take less than seven minutes a day. You guys it’s insane. We’ll go ahead and leave the link to join commitment week 2021, as well as the link to download Eric’s book in the show notes, or you can also just simply join commitment week by visiting Sweetlife coat.com forward slash commitment dash week dash 2021. Right? You guys be awesome. Can’t wait to talk to you next week.

 

Bye bye. For now

Episode 206: 3 Tips To Put Family First As An Entrepreneur & Create More Time Freedom – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Download: The Ultimate Guide to Choosing the Online Business Model That’s Right for You

Who This Episode is Great For:

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Start to Scale Up System™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?  www.sweetlifeco.com/quiz
 
Small business owners who are looking to gain control of time and manage family and company growth. 

Summary:

Growing a company while raising a family is a lot of work. Oftentimes entrepreneurs feel maxed out, and “Cat’s in the Cradle” by Harry Chapin breaks your heart. You started your company for freedom, and you know you can obtain it, but you don’t want to wait to sell or years more of hard work before reaping family life’s rewards. 
 
In this episode we break down 3 practical systems you can implement this week, that require minimal work and will gain you maximum time freedom.

At the End of This Episode You Will

  1. See how you can tweak your business model right now to create more time
  2. Know the power of messy days, how to schedule them and why you’ll love them
  3. Know more creative ways you can connect with your #1 team (family)

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi, you guys. And welcome to episode number 206 of the sweet life entrepreneur podcast, and Merry Christmas to those of you who are listening to this live and happy holidays to everybody, regardless of what you celebrate here,

 

we are celebrating family, and I just hope that this show reaches you and that you’re blessed by what we talk about today. Thank you so much for tuning in with us over the holidays. We’ve never missed an episode so far. And this year with all that’s happened in 2020 is no exception. And so today we are talking about three simple ways to put family first as an entrepreneur and create more time.

 

So whether you’re listening to this live and it is Christmas week here in 2020, or you’re listening to this down the road, everything we’re talking about is a proven business strategy that you’re going to be able to take to the bank and create more time in your life, whatever you want your life to look like. I know that many of you who’ve listened to this show for years.

 

You know, that half of the time my teenage boys are walking in and out of the door. On the other side of, of my office recording here, you know, with their friends or to the skate park, you know, wherever it is that you are doing life, we need to create a business model, a lifestyle around enabling that. And so this show fits really well into what we’re talking about right now with the holidays,

 

with, you know, really cherishing life. I think the one thing that for us, it was just such a hidden blessing that came out of 2020 is just really loving being together at home and cherishing time. The one thing that money can’t buy is a second of time. And so a lot of things we’re talking about here on the show we’ve been talking about for years,

 

but in this episode is all strategies to control time into a create as much time so that you are enabling family first in your business. This episode is for those of you guys who are in any phase of my start to scale up system. And so that’s phase one through five, whether you’re just thinking about starting a business, or you are a seasoned entrepreneur,

 

that’s making a huge impact this show. And what we’re talking about here applies to all of you guys who are looking to gain control of time and manage family and company growth. Because the reality is, is a growing a company and raising a family is a lot of work. And oftentimes we as entrepreneurs feel super maxed out right in that song, cats in the cradle,

 

I’d sing it to you, but I’ve a really terrible voice that song comes on and it’s like heartbreaking. And, and I was actually just listening to it last week with my boys. And one of my kids asked guys, you know, I love song, but what does it actually mean? And I was like, ah, you know, it’s about this dad that worked so hard that he never had time for his kid and he regretted it.

 

And it was like, Oh, that through the gut, I know we feel that as entrepreneurs. So that’s how we were talking about some strategies here on the show. At the end of this episode, this is what you’re going to know. So you are going to see how you can tweak your current business model right now to create more time like instantly right now,

 

as you’re listening to the show, we are going to talk about the power of messy days, how you can schedule them and why you will love messy days. And I’m going to share with you some behind the scenes about how I schedule these types of things. And you are going to know more creative ways that you can connect with your number one team,

 

which is your family. And if you don’t have kids in your listening to this show, this family, your family is your support system, your network, whatever that looks like to you, all of our lives are beautifully different. And so whatever that looks like to you, you’re going to be able to take the strategies that we talk about here on this episode and apply them right away to your business and for all the show notes and the resources we mentioned here in the show,

 

cruise over to Sweetlife co.com. Again, that Sweetlife co.com click on podcast. And this is episode number two, zero six. Okay. Let’s dive into today’s strategies. It’s going to be a real quick show cause it’s a holiday week, but really powerful. So stick with me.<inaudible> Step number one, in order to create more time in your business for family and lifestyle freedom,

 

we need to look at your business model. So your business model can either bury you or save you. So the first thing I want you to look at is really how you’re serving clients. How much of that time does that of your time, does that take within a week and understand the demands of delivering certain projects or services places on your time, energy and your ability to focus.

 

First of all, what do you do? Take a look at what you do. Just kind of picture your, your week and how you’re working with clients. Do you work with people? One-on-one do you work with people, one on group? How does that really look in your life? And right now I want you to assess that. And I want you to understand the time that’s required,

 

that you are spending currently working with your clients and take a look at this current business model that you have. What does that look like? How do you work with people? Is it one-on-one? Is it one on group? How frequently in the first thing you want to do is you want to ask yourself, you know, Hey, is this working for me or is the actual amount of time that I’m spending with my clients taking away time from family?

 

Now one might say, well, wow, isn’t that great? You know, you’re, you’re so busy. Your business is so busy. You have so many clients. Yes, that is true, but busy doesn’t equal. Good. So we’re going to give you some tips here to take a look at turning busy-ness into profit and time. And so the first thing I want you to do is I want you to ask yourself,

 

what can I change right now? So that would be, are you seeing clients five days a week? You and these are just some suggestions for you. Can you block and tackle your client days as an example, I only work with clients privately on Thursdays and Fridays. And I’ve shared this with you guys on the show before, and I’ll share with you again,

 

because I just get great feedback from this time. Number one, I think, I think best when I consolidate my work. So if I know that Thursdays and Fridays are, or my business coaching days, when I work with entrepreneurs and small businesses, then I get in that mindset and I know what I’m doing. I also then can look at my business model and I can say,

 

okay, all of these businesses are in this same type of need, this same type of area. And so now I’m going to create groups and I actually scale my business model and I always do this again, reassess it. So I have, if I have five clients that are in the same place and need the same things, I actually will offer a group strategy call for those clients.

 

It’s great for me, it’s great for them to network with other people and everybody gets the same results. So I want you to look at your business right now and ask yourself, can I number one block and tackle my days. And then within those days, what sort of smart scaling can I do for my business model? So can you create group offers?

 

Can you create some on-demand content that your clients or your customers might want to absorb, instead of saying the same thing to different people? One-on-one can you create maybe an online resource center for your clients to tap into some of your more, more frequently asked questions to help save some of that time or even create a course or an actual program for them to go through online.

 

Other strategies for you are creating maybe a membership committee, unity, or an online forum this year can be done with Slack or something easily with boxer, where you create a group of people that you want to connect with and you want to help them Connect with each other, but you don’t want to launch a full-blown membership site because that might not really work with your actual business model.

 

So those are some suggestions of things that you can look at right now in your business, so that you can say, Hey, listen, what can I actually change immediately? What can I actually group together to save my time? And what are the dates phase where I would like to serve my clients? Another reason I haven’t mentioned it here, but why I serve clients on Thursdays and Fridays is because of the entire beginning of my week is on business building content creation and actual strategy.

 

And so I take care of the business building inside in the beginning of my week, when my mind is fresh. For example, I’m recording this podcast episode on a Monday, usually record on Mondays or Tuesdays. When I know that I can put really powerful, highly impacting content. And then I take care of serving my clients because once I go in and I start immersing myself in my client’s businesses,

 

it fully takes over all my thought processes. So that’s one of the reasons why I serve clients towards the end of the week. And then I have that weekend break in between. So action item. Number one is take a look at your current business model. Can you group together the days that you serve your customers, serve your clients, and can you make some changes to how you’re serving your clients?

 

Creating group offers a membership community, or even just an online forum and really take a look at controlling instead of spreading yourself out throughout the week, consolidating your work into different types of work that you were doing at a time. That’s really strategy. Number one, within that same strategy. We talked about this a few episodes ago on the show within that same strategy,

 

you should be planning your year in advance. So planning what you’re selling when you’re selling it. So, you know, we have a big macro plan and then we have a micro plan week by week. So you really should be taking a look at what’s happening for the year to come. Regardless of when you’re listening to this episode, you can do this at any point in time and really know what you’re selling when you’re selling it and what demands that’s going to put on your life and your family,

 

okay. Strategy, or I should say, tip number two is my favorite. And I call it for the love of messy days. This is what a messy day is. A messy day is a day that I have scheduled in the middle of my week. My messy day is always Wednesday. And that day is a break between my strategy and my content creation at the beginning of the week.

 

And my client service at the end of the week, messy days are totally to be spontaneous. And this is an amazing thing. It’s especially amazing if you have teenagers like I do. So on my messy days, I really don’t schedule any client meetings, but this is the day I schedule like the kids’ teeth cleaning, or if I need to stop by the grocery store or any appointments like I would have for myself,

 

like going to get my eyelashes glued on or a haircut, all of those things are always scheduled on a Wednesday. This is also the day where I am completely able to be spontaneous with my kids. Do I have to get work done? Yes. I still work on messy days. So Wednesday is my favorite day to be this day. But it’s also the day that,

 

you know, if my kids just want to sit down and, and have a cup of coffee and hang out where I always don’t have somewhere to be, I always can make sure that that is in that day. And they literally throw the plan out the window again. Do you have a list of things you have to get done on messages? Yes.

 

Are they so regimented and scheduled? Not at all is one of the things I love doing with my kids on messy days is we have this taco wagon down the street and it’s just this amazing Mexican food that’s here in Lafayette, Colorado love taco wagon, and the kids will just be hungry. I’ll say, Hey, let’s, let’s go to taco wagon and grab some tacos and it’s super spontaneous and they love it.

 

We listen to music. We play music messy days are the days where I can just stop and walk out of my office and share songs with the kids and listening to what they’re listening to, or watch YouTube videos or sit down and play call of duty, which by the way I suck at on Xbox. But I try, you know, those are the things we do on messy days.

 

And so messy days are a day sometime in your week, if you can’t fit it in every single week, maybe plan and schedule a messy day every two weeks. And again, this is the time for you to know this is when you can fit in your haircuts teeth, cleaning, having to run an errand, maybe go to the post office. But it’s also the day where you can totally stop and have a cup of coffee with a friend who just might really need you call your aunt on the phone,

 

who you haven’t talked to in forever. And all those things that get scheduled out because the schedule is too regimented. Messy days is totally to not be regimented, but you will love it because you’ll actually get more work done in the other days. When you know, you have your messy day, wherever that may land in your week. And then the third tip I have for you is to really over communicate with your family over communicate with your team.

 

Again, whoever that is, it can be, you know, young, old, it can be your dog. You know, I used to communicate with my toddlers, my boys, when I was working from home and say, okay, you know, mommy really has a lot of work to do for the next two hours. But after that, we’ll sit down and we’ll watch Mickey mouse together or whatever.

 

And so as long as you’re over communicating, what’s about to happen with your team. Then everybody is going into that with open eyes and they understand how they can support you in that process. Again, it doesn’t matter if they’re three or if they’re 35, they all understand that. So some suggestions on how to over communicate with everybody, but in a way,

 

that’s not going to take you too much time because that’s would be against the point of this whole entire episode is number one. Every single Sunday night, just have a quick weekly powwow. We do this all the time. We go through the week, we look at our calendars, see what’s coming up and everybody’s just on the same page. It literally takes five minutes and that’s for a family of five to do,

 

but it helps to just communicate and what’s to come. It also helps us all mentally prepare for the week ahead and how we want to show up in that week. We also have a nightly pregame. And so a nightly pregame again, literally takes like one minute saying, okay, this is what the morning is going to look like. This is what I have today.

 

This is what you know, you have going on this next day. This is what this looks like for our family. Let’s again, have everybody be on the same page. It’s also the place where I can take a minute. If my kids need to talk about school or things they’re struggling with and help them strategize a plan to, you know, maybe make up some schoolwork,

 

which frankly has been a lot since everybody’s doing online school and it’s a freaking mess. I won’t go down that rabbit hole, but it’s a time for me to really connect with my boys and hear like, yeah, I just have this, I have this math test tomorrow. I have no clue what I’m doing and really be able to focus in on them.

 

And I know that they really appreciate this nightly pre-game as well. Couple of things we also do and we’ve done for years and years and years is we calendar share. We’ve also taught our boys how to add things to our family calendar. So we have one Gmail address where we manage all of our kid and family things. And so anytime one of our kids has something they want to do.

 

They want to ride to the skate park or they want to go sleep over with a friend or whatever it may be. My boys can add that event and share it to our family calendar. So without even talking, we all know what everybody wants and needs over a period of time. And so everybody’s on the same page without taking any time whatsoever. And you might be asking like,

 

okay, how do I do this? My kids are five. Well, of course this is age appropriate, but I will say that we started teaching our boys to add things to our family, shared Gmail calendar when they were as young as nine years old. So these kids can do anything with tech, right? So you would be very surprised at the wishes we receive on our family calendar.

 

And it’s really cool. That’s how our kids get to do things because it’s planned in a way that works for everybody. And then the last suggestion that I would have for you is a family chat or a family WhatsApp channel or family Voxer. If you’ve never tried any of that, those are all awesome places to create a group chat where everybody’s on the same page.

 

And you as the business owner can even just shoot, instead of calling this person and telling this person to pick up that person, you can just get on your boxer and just say, okay, you know, I’m running 10 minutes late from this meeting. We’re having chicken for dinner. I’ll see you soon, whatever it is that you need to say,

 

you can, you can put in a box or chat to your family. And it’s a really efficient way to actually create more time. Again, if your family is, is a roommate, if your family is, you know, your other business team, or if it’s friends, whoever your people are, these are three simple ways to put those people,

 

to put your family first as an entrepreneur and create more time in your business. And so here’s what we talked about today. We talked about how does your current business model and know how to group your days together and what you can tweak and scale and your business model right now, in order to create more time each week, we also talked about messy days,

 

why you need messy days, why you’ll love them, why your family will love your messy days and really why it just frankly, it’s going to make you think, wow, I’m so glad I’m an entrepreneur instead of wow, crap. This is way harder than I thought it would be. Is there ever going to be a light at the end of this,

 

you know, constant tunnel of demands, messy days, fix that, like in an instant. So if any of these things I can say, I love my messy days the most. And then the third thing is think of more creative ways to connect with your family, whether it’s calendar share or Voxer and different ways to communicate, whether it’s a weekly powwow or a nightly powwow.

 

We talked about that as well. I hope you found some of these suggestions helpful to you and your team, your people, all the people that love you. And you know what it’s really special to have people in your life that love you so much. They just want more of you and they need more of you. That’s a gift. And you know,

 

I know we’re also grateful for that. So it’s really important as small business owners that we take strategies like this business model, calendar share and more practical lifestyle strategies in order to create this time and in life freedom, I’m here to help. I’m here to support you. It’s what I do here on the show. I’m a business strategist, but I’ve built multiple companies with kids.

 

I think I launched my first business when my youngest was six weeks old. So I totally get it. Whatever phase you’re in of parenting. Thank you so much for listening to this show. Again, happy holidays. Happy new year, let’s kick 2020, like to the curb behind us. And I’m so excited to start 2021 with you. We have a lot of amazing things coming up on the show,

 

including commitment week 20, 21, five days. I’m only 10 minutes a day to completely lay out your entire 20, 21 business plan coming up here next week. And so I dive into commitment week 2021 with us next week’s episode number 207. All right, you guys, I will talk to you soon. Have an awesome day.

Episode 203: How To Create Your 2021 Online Business and Lifestyle Plan – April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the live workshop for detailed steps on planning 2021, Dec. 10, 2020 – join our Premier Online Community for only $7/ month

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for entrepreneurs in all stages of my Start To Scale Up System™ – take the quiz here to find out and receive a personalized business growth plan.

Summary:

Whether you’re heading to a family reunion are planning to hike the John Muir Trail, Lifestyle freedom is the reason why you became an entrepreneur. Let’s make sure you’re planning your year in advance to actually make it happen. For the past three years I’ve recorded an episode every December to teach how I lay out my year for family and travel first, while assuring I’ve reached the profit benchmarks I need to to make it all happen. In this episode I lay out those steps to make sure my year it’s exactly the way I want it to be. (Regardless of what craziness comes in the year to come, creating a plan is essential to ever getting what you want.)

At the End of This Episode You Will

  1. Know how to layout the whole year for lifestyle freedom
  2. Be able to assess what changes may need to happen in your offers and services to reach your lifestyle goals
  3. Have the most important math equation that business coaches don’t tell you – and if you don’t know these numbers – you’re sunk

Resources Mentioned:

 
Join the live workshop for detailed steps on planning 2021, Dec. 10, 2020 – join our Premier Online Community for only $7/ month


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. You guys. It’s so great to talk to you again. This is Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. So number 203, and I’m April beach, your host here at the show and at the recording of this,

 

we are turning over into the month of December. I’m so excited. I know you’re with me. Let’s have jazz hands here. We’re ready to put this year behind us. And in the process of doing that, it’s time to plan for 2021. So this episode is a really cool episode. It’s actually a great show. I have recorded this show and released it in December for the last three years in a row.

 

And today we’re talking all about the steps to plan this next upcoming year for profit and lifestyle freedom. And so this is a great show for those of you guys that are wondering how to plan out your business plan for the upcoming year. But also you share the same values as me, where as you want to make sure you’re setting aside time to be with your family,

 

to travel to your kid’s soccer, things that they’re going to do to go visit your family reunion at the Lake, whatever it is that you want to do, that you have a vision that you want to do, that you can do for the upcoming year. And the truth of the matter is, is if we don’t plan your business for this in advance,

 

it’s never going to happen, never, ever, ever going to happen. And regardless of any global pandemic or anything else that comes around or where we are as a world, as the new year rolls around, you have to have a plan or it’s never going to happen. So that’s what we’re talking about on today’s show. And you know, people ask me all the time,

 

how I’m able to run two companies, have a busy podcast and still be able to travel with my kids. So in 2019, I was away from the house for almost six months for the whole year, traveling and living in different places. And this is how I did it. So even though this year, didn’t roll out the way all of us wanted.

 

I’m still going to teach you how to plan for it for the years to come. And in this show, this is what you can expect. At the end of this episode, you’re going to know how to lay out your whole entire year for lifestyle freedom. And I’m going to give you the steps, almost the order of operations in which I go through this every single year.

 

You’re also going to be able to assess what changes you need to make to your current offers. That’s actually going to make that happen. This shows can help you open up your eyes in a very sobering way. I’ll be honest regarding what you’re selling and whether or not what you have in your menu of offers and services and programs is honestly ever going to get you to the lifestyle that you want.

 

And we’re going to do that by making sure you have the most important math equation. I hate math too. I’ll be honest, but there are some pretty important math equations that most business coaches don’t tell you that I need to make sure that you’re aware of. Because if you don’t know these numbers, if you don’t hit these numbers, you’re never going to have lifestyle freedom.

 

And so we’re going to dive into all of those things on today’s show. Again, this is Sweetlife podcast episode number 203. So you can cruise over to Sweetlife code.com or find us on all of the podcasts listening apps in all of the show notes will be@sweetlifecode.com. Number two Oh three. And we do have a couple of bonuses for those of you guys that are really interested in making sure you’re nailing your 2021 business and profit plan.

 

The first thing is join us over in our Sweetlife community. We have just launched our premier members community. It’s $7 a month. Yes, I’m charging $7 a month for it. We really only want to make sure serious business builders are in there. And so we need to charge people something. Otherwise we just have dead weight. I don’t like dead weight in my communities.

 

So cruise over to Sweetlife community.com and in December, I am going to be teaching a class, a workshop taking you step-by-step through the process of laying everything out that I’m talking about high level on the podcast. So join me on December. The, let me look up the date for you 17th, as long as you joined Sweetlife community.com, cruise over there and pay your little puny $7,

 

I will be teaching you a live masterclass and taking your questions on top of that as you’re going through this training. And as we’re talking about what you need to do, step-by-step to lay out your year, if you’re struggling whatsoever with your offers, if you can’t hit your offer numbers that you need to hit, then go to signature offer.com. There’s nothing I can give you right now,

 

but you can join our wait list for our new signature offer masterclass. It’s opening up again in February of 2021. So those are some resources. They’re all there in our show notes. And let’s go ahead and dive into today’s business training.<inaudible> The steps to plan your business year for profit and lifestyle freedom. So starting with the most important thing you have to have is a primary offer that you know,

 

will generate the revenue that you want. So how do you know that you have to take time to craft an outline, a high value, high impact program service, signature offer, or package. So if you haven’t done that yet, that’s your very, very first step. Again, if you need help with that cruise over to signature offer.com and we’ll connect in my in February.

 

But the very, very first thing is making sure that you have a primary offer that is high value, high impact that people meet, where they want so much, that they are seeking you out. It’s something that is incredibly needed in your space. And they’re going to pay you to solve this for them because they either don’t want to, or they can’t do it on their own.

 

They can’t do it without you. So you need to make sure that you have this primary offer and that it’s nailed down. Emitted is awesome. So we can’t plan your year. We can’t plan profit unless we know you have something incredible that you’re selling. And I’m talking about the primary offer that you were selling. So after you know what your primary income source will be,

 

then I want you to look at the year. I want you to look at a calendar and this is how I do this. This is how I teach it. And I’m telling you what you guys have been doing this now for about seven years, every single year, it’s exponentially better. So step number one is to look at your whole entire calendar.

 

If you’ve ever seen behind the scenes, I literally have a 12 foot calendar going across my wall. I’m a calendar dork. It’s a dry erase calendar I got from Amazon. And I can look on my wall and whatever calendar you like to use. I want you to block off all the times in this upcoming year that you plan to travel or take off work in the whole entire year.

 

So if you don’t have a specific plans yet, but you know, you want to travel, make sure you block off those times now. So for example, I have no idea where exactly I am going to travel next summer, but I can tell you what I know I’m going to be on the East coast, at least a dozen times at lacrosse tournaments over the months of June and July.

 

And I know I’m going to be on the West coast with my other son dancing in the spring. So I’m still blocking off those times in my calendar, even if they’re just general times. And I don’t know exactly when I’m going yet, but generally I know that I’m not going to be in the same work capacity. So after you’ve gone through your calendar and you’ve thought about the times that you want to travel,

 

even if you don’t have specific plans yet, even if we don’t know what the world is going to look like, I want you to block them off now or you know what you’re never ever going for sure. And step number two is to block off any professional development time after you block off your personal time. So this could be time for working on any projects that you’ve set aside,

 

like writing that book, or maybe doing a big project, like rebuilding your website that you really can’t dive into because you haven’t blocked off all the busy-ness of work in life. So I want you to go and I want you to think, when do I want to be working on these projects? When does this make sense to me to reach this specific goal?

 

And I want you to note it on your calendar and if needed, you might need to take off or reduce your client or business service time to develop your new professional skills or write that book or whatever it is. So step one is blocking off travel time, family time, when you just really don’t want to be in the office setting. Number two is setting aside your professional development time and what this does,

 

is this a side note here? It’s super cool because as you see these conferences coming up, whether they’re online or in person or a mastermind that you want to join being offered in 2021, you know that you will have already made those things important. And so now you can look for those things that actually fit into your calendar. Look for the opportunities,

 

the mentors you want to work with and the trips that you want to go on professionally or the work that you want to do. So that is why blocking off your professional time. Come second, because again, those are things that they come last, usually for us as business owners and they shouldn’t. And then after you’ve blocked off and secured your personal growth time and your lifestyle time,

 

now let’s get into how you’re going to pay for it. Right? So looking at your primary offer, I want you to ask yourself, can you still deliver this primary offer during any of your blocked off times as the answer is yes, then there’s really nothing much you need to do. But if the answer is no, then you’ve keenly become aware that you need to sell more of your offer in less time.

 

So you better be strategic to pull it off, right? So therefore I want you to block off your primary selling period and product or service delivery times for this primary product or offer. I’ll give you a personal example. I always like to try to show you guys behind the scenes. So I know that I’m traveling a lot in June or July. So when I open up my,

 

your signature offer masterclass, for example, it is never going to be in June or July because I will never ever do it. I’m not going to be here to do that, right? So I know that the times I’ve blocked off on my calendar to invite people, to join me in my signature offer masterclass, I need to make sure that I am hitting our financial end goal benchmarks during those times.

 

And you need to do the very same thing. So go on block off your primary selling periods. And when you are offering that particular primary offer in order that it’s going to work with the rest of your calendar side note to those of you guys that are in somewhat of a seasonal business, there are certain seasons that align with when people buy. So,

 

you know, if you’re a realtor, there’s a house buying. If you will kind of season, you know, you’re not going to not plan to sell during when your primary season, it would be like a bathing suit shop closing in the summer. So although we are designing your life because we’re creating a profit plan that gives you lifestyle freedom. We always have to be obviously realistic.

 

When do people want to buy what you’re offering? And so take that into consideration when you’re going through and planning this. So first we’ve laid out your personal time off second, we lay out your professional time off third. We note on your calendar, your primary selling periods. Again, in order to pull off the lifestyle side of it, we need to sell more in less time.

 

So now we need to look at those numbers. And this is when the sobering part of the podcast training comes next. You need to crunch the numbers. This is seriously not rocket science. I am terrible at math. How many of your offer do you need to sell in order to hit your financial benchmarks for that particular product in those groups of times,

 

for the year. And in order to answer that you need to know some basic things about your primary offer. First, first of all, what is it cost? And secondly, what is your capacity? Your capacity is how many people you can serve at once. So what is the cost of your offer and how many people can you actually have based on your business capacity,

 

serving during those times of the year that you need to sell your primary offer. And then once you’ve gone through it for your primary offer, then you’re going to rinse and repeat the same step for any other offers. You have secondary offers, digital products, quick grab things that might not require so much of your time. So first I want you to do it for your primary sales objective,

 

your primary signature program service, whatever it is, you do know how much it costs and ask yourself how many people can I serve at a time. And these numbers become really sobering for some businesses. You may realize that with your offer, the way that it is, you can never reach your financial benchmarks. And I’ll talk to you about what to do here in a second.

 

Give that to you then. And again, I want you to rinse and repeat this for any other offers that you have. And so you’re going to end up with some basic but powerful math and these answers to these math questions or really sobering. So you will learn that you possibly need to alter and change some of your products, business model to serve more people,

 

to reach your financial benchmarks. And this is what we call scaling. This is what my company does. This is our Ninja skill. We help companies take your assets and scale them with other online business models and offers, and is a side note. If you’re ready to scale, then you know where to come. But if you’re looking at your offers and saying,

 

wow, I have this really amazing. Let’s say, for example, you are a career coach have this really amazing career coaching, but it’s one-on-one. So we need to, to create other opportunities for you to bring in more streams of income, using your expertise, your intellectual property, your content, and your assets, so that you can still keep your one-on-one clients.

 

But then we’re adding more revenue through scaling by other offers. So this math is really going to let you, you know, Hey, does my current business model actually support the lifestyle I really, really want? And then here is the next part. This is the part that most business coaches, well not tell you. So we have this number, right?

 

We have this dollar amount that you need to hit in order to be able to take the other time off, to head to that mastermind, to pay for that mastermind for him and sakes. So the other sobering reality, every single entrepreneur should know and opens up the world of sales. Statistics is the average sales conversion rate is 3%. Now, every industry is totally different.

 

This is just generally speaking, but this is the baseline number to start with. I’ve done a ton of podcast, by the way, you guys, on how to increase your conversion rates. And as an example, most of our clients close it over 80% with their sales calls. But the reality is is if you’re selling like a digital product or a low touch sales funnel,

 

let’s just call it 3%. I would rather underestimate and have you underestimate than overestimate. So if we have our dollar amount, right, that you have to hit, right for your primary offers and your secondary offers taking the percentage that 3% are going to convert. This is your next question. You need to ask yourself how many people do you need to reach in order to convert the numbers of products you need to sell to reach your financial benchmarks at 3%.

 

So if you need to sell $300,000 to sustain the life that you want, that your company, and this is all growth, but $300,000, and let’s say your product or your service is worth 10,000, then you need to sell 30 of them, right? Basic math. But now here’s the reality check. Now ask yourself, 30 sales is 3% of what number in.

 

This is a number of people you need to reach in your marketing in order to hit that financial benchmark. And the answer to that is a thousand. So if you you’re wrapping up your really plan and you want to mindfully create your marketing strategy around the number of people you need to reach, not the number of people you want to sell. I need to know that you know that number.

 

So if you need to sell 30 of your primary offer or your combination of offers in order to hit the sales conversion yeah. And that you want, how many people do you need to reach? And as you’re going back to your map, your map, I call it map. Everything’s a map in my head. As you’re going back to your calendar could a map,

 

right? As you’re going back to your calendar, make sure that you are blocking off your marketing time out on your calendar, that you are enabling for ample warm up time with your audience, ample relationship, building time, grassroots marketing on top of the regular digital marketing strategies so that we can increase your conversion rates to exceed your baseline sales needs and expectations.

 

So this is all about planning and calendar planning, but it’s important that you know, the difference between how many you want to sell and based on basic sales conversions, how many people you need to reach, because we have to plan your marketing and your strategy, the time in your calendar to make sure that you are nailing it. Well, I hope that makes sense.

 

Again, if you want me to roll up my sleeves with you in there and talk about these numbers we can do. So, and the workshop that I am teaching in Sweetlife community.com in December, you can join me over there and I’ll give you some extra help with this and really work through, take your personal questions. I’d love to see you in there.

 

So in summary, wrapping it all up here for you to plan your year for freedom. First, you start with blocking out what you personally professionally need. That’s a very first thing to block out in your calendar. If you don’t do it, you guys it’s never, ever going to happen. Then you reverse engineer the numbers, hand in hand with your calendar to make sure that you have planned the marketing programs and the service delivery systems in conjunction with the sales to reach those numbers.

 

In most cases, you’ll realize it’s time to scale that you’re going to have to change some of your offers, maybe add some additional revenue streams of income so that you can work less utilizing the assets you already have in order to hit the numbers and reach the lifestyle for you and that you want. So whether you’re heading on a family reunion or are going with your girlfriends to hike the John Muir trail lifestyle freedoms,

 

the reason why you became an entrepreneur, right? So let’s make sure that you’re planning your year in advance and you’re crunching the numbers. You’re creating the programs and the offers that are actually going to get you there. So I hope you found this episode helpful. I hope this wasn’t the first time that you were aware of the percentage of, of sales conversions and how to plan that into your marketing time and strategy.

 

But if it is, I’m so glad that you were here, it’s a really sobering non-sexy number that really opens up how important marketing your business is. And so today we talked about knowing how to lay out your whole entire year for lifestyle freedom, making sure you’re laying out your things you need first. Otherwise it never happened. We talked about being able to assess what changes you might need to scale your current offers or change a business model in order to reach your lifestyle goals and to do so.

 

We need to reach your financial benchmarks. And we talked about knowing this basic math and making sure that you’re looking at your numbers and they’re going to tell you, do I need to change my offer? Do I need to make it more of a higher value? What do I need to do to my offer my program, my service in order to be able to charge that or do I need to scale other things that I already have?

 

So I hope you guys found this helpful. I love chatting with you. Welcome to December. I’m so glad we’re here. I hope that your holiday season is kicking off and that you’re just having a great time, that you’re super healthy, where you are and spending time with those people. You love again, cruise over to Sweetlife community.com. If you want to join me in there and connect with us further,

 

and thank you for tuning into this show, please share it with your friends. All the show notes can be found at Sweetlife co Right? I’ll talk to you soon.

Episode 202: Tactics To Becoming A Confident Introverted Entrepreneur – Stephanie Thoma

Stephanie Toma SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join our online community to start networking confidently in our monthly coffee connection. 

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for entrepreneurs in all stages of my business growth system who are introverts. You love who you are, but know that being a little “type A” could grow your business a lot.

Summary:

This episode is for entrepreneurs who are introverted but know you need to become more of an extrovert to share your business with others. It can feel like a challenge and our guest today, Stephanie Thoma, author of The Confident Introvert, is here to help.  In this short episode, you’ll learn simple strategies to become more comfortable outside of your comfort zone. Plus, we also do a little practice session in this episode to help you relax. This is a great show for those who really prefer your own company but know your business needs to be shared.

At the End of This Episode You Will:

  1. Feel most settled about being an introvert in an extroverted world
  2. Have meditation/prayer practice to calm your nerves
  3. Understand how to manage external communications while remaining the introverted person you love to be.

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

 

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everyone. And welcome back again to this sweet life entrepreneur podcast today, Or talking specifically with those of you who feel like you are an introvert and you’re an entrepreneur you want to lead in your space,

 

but there are some different social barriers that you have trouble approaching and crossing as an introvert and the work that you do in your business. You want it to feel authentic, how you show up on social media. You want it to be authentic to who you are, and you really love your comfort zone. And so today on the show, we’re talking to Stephanie Toma and Stephanie is truly an expert at helping those of you who are introverts to really step out and lead in your space.

 

She is a networking strategy coach event, host and founder of the confident introvert. She’s also an author of a new book that came out this past June called the confident introvert. She is an introvert herself and she’s facilitated over a thousand events and established a fulfilling career. Helping people generate meaningful connections at online and in-person events. And her mission is to help you feel confident and establish really amazing business relationships that catapult you forward in your career.

 

Stephanie has been featured by Forbes business, insider entrepreneur thrive global, and so many other places, including being invited to speak at Harvard, Northwestern, and Boston universities, as well as internationally to date, Stephanie has helped thousands of people just like you. You’re an entrepreneur, or you want to step into leadership. She’s helped thousands of people like you to make sure that you can celebrate your strengths as who you are and be authentic with confidence and make meaningful connections.

 

It’s not sounding so great. I’ll be honest with you. I learned so much. I’m not an introvert. I’m definitely an extrovert. And so many of the strategies we talked about on today’s show, including like a quick short guided meditation that we went through was so powerful. So this show is for you introvert entrepreneurs, but it also is for those of you guys that might actually be going so fast at a trillion gazillion miles an hour,

 

that you need some resetting techniques too. So I was so excited to invite Stephanie onto the show. At the end of this show, you are going to have solutions to how to approach anxiety and different hacks to get through times when you’re anxious, you are going to know how to approach social media as an introvert and how to show up across social media.

 

And you’re going to get tips on how to network, even though we’re talking about online networking, how to network confidently and different web apps, strategies, and different ways that you can connect with people that isn’t just doing it cold really ways to enter you into relationships with people in a way that feels confident to you. So if all that sounds great, stick around because we’re going to dive in all the show notes from today’s show can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com,

 

including all of the business programs available to you to develop your programs, your signature offers, and your 2021 business strategy cruise over to Sweetlife co.com. We’re here to help. Let’s go ahead and dive in.<inaudible> All right. Hey, you guys, April here and I am joined by Stephanie Toma. And today we are talking, especially to all of you introverts out there.

 

You are experts your leaders, your entrepreneurs, your creatives, you know, you are where exactly where you’re supposed to be, but maybe there are some struggles that you have that other entrepreneurs may not have as far as how to be confident and own who you are as a person and the business side of it. And that is why Stephanie Toma is here on the show today.

 

Stephanie, thank you so much for joining us. Tell us a little bit about you and your area of expertise when it comes to confident introvert entrepreneurship. Yes. Hey April, thank you for having me. So my company is competent introvert and there are a few different tiers there. I do individual coaching focused on leadership development and also a variety of webinars focused on networking,

 

remotely, networking in person, and also cultivating authentic competence. That’s rooted from within. I’m certainly not about faking it until you make it. It’s about actually from a root level, understanding what are the roadblocks and navigating those to have an authentic sense of confidence that is unshakable, even as an introvert, there’s such a common misconception that if you get your energy from solitude,

 

which is the definition of introversion, that, Oh, you’re meant to be a wallflower and that’s not true as introverts. We can authentically connect with more than just one person it’s quite possible, but there are just little tweaks that can help us navigate social spaces. I love what you said. If you get your energy from solitude, I never realized that was the definition.

 

I’ve actually think there’s probably a lot of people that can relate to that and be like, Oh gosh, maybe, maybe I do have some, some aspects or characteristics of introvert than I, then I didn’t even realize that, you know, people just really, really get their energy from that space. So thank you so much for being on the show and you are the author of a new book.

 

We want to make sure that you mentioned that just came out for those of you introverts. Tell us really quick about your book. Yes. Yeah. So competent introvert, a practical Guide to connecting with others at networking events and beyond it came out this past June. And it’s all about how to go from point a to point B point a being I would like to connect with people.

 

I would like to get out there and grow in my career, whatever that looks like. I like to become clear on my goals and achieve them become successful, but how do I get there? So this book really fills in those gaps and leverages the most fun way to get ahead in your career, which is through making authentic friendships, which is your network and coming from a place of,

 

okay, how can I help people? And then, Oh, I have a bunch of friends and maybe I can ask for help when I need it. And it becomes this really synergistic sort of experience, but it’s all about taking the first step and beginning to network. So basically I have hosted over 1000 networking events and before I hosted network events, I was attending them.

 

So that’s what prompted writing the book. I realized that there’s magic and there’s learning in numbers and having been to a high volume and hosted them. I was really excited to put pen to paper and just let this flow out of me last year. I love that what an amazing resource for people. And so you have attended thousands of events, you’ve hosted over a thousand events and you are stereotypically.

 

What somebody would say is, yeah, I’m an introvert. And so this like really leads us into the very first step that you’re going to share with us today. Let’s talk about just some general anxieties for introverts and some of the things that introverts experience that other entrepreneurs might not experience as far as from the social emotional standpoint at these events. Can you share a little bit about what that feels like for an introvert versus somebody who’s just super out there and in everybody’s business and face like me?

 

Yeah. And Hey, it’s great. We need both ways that everyone shows up, but I would say that one of our core needs is to feel understood and to be understood. So there are a couple of different areas of dissonance that introverts specifically can come up against in a networking capacity. One scenario is everyone thinks I’m so quiet. If I speak up,

 

then it contradicts what people expected me and what I expect of myself and not as uncomfortable. So that’s one way. And then the other way, this is what I more recently have sort of encountered, which is people assuming that I am an extrovert because I have developed social skills and I use them actively. So there can be this dissonance of, Oh,

 

I’m quiet. Everyone thinks I’m quiet. I don’t want to be different than that. Or Whoa. Everyone thinks that I get my energy from others because I can talk with people, but it’s like the secret that I’m an introvert. Interesting. I mean, I can’t exactly understand, but I can see how that, that would be stressful. And so from an anxiety standpoint,

 

how do you manage the anxiety of attending these types of events or frankly, how do you manage the anxiety of operating as a founder, as a CEO and as an introvert? What are some of those anxieties? Yes. So in a virtual world, one of the ways that we can alleviate anxiety is by taking steps to avoid burnout. I mean, I’m sure you’ve probably experienced zoom fatigue.

 

It’s just a guess. It’s super common just when you bond, like from one event, the other to the other and you realize, Oh, I should be energized. I’m just sitting in my chair for eight hours straight and not doing anything. It should be fine. However, we find ourselves depleted and the antidote to that is a concept from my book,

 

competent introvert, it’s called a solitude sandwich. Essentially, we can do this with our socialize. We can do this during the Workday. We can translate this in person or online. And basically what that means is the contents of the sandwich. The meat of it. If you’re vegetarian, let’s go with some PB and J that’s your activity. That is what you’re actively engaging in.

 

Maybe it is a phone call with someone, maybe it’s going out to dinner, whatever it is, making sure that on either end of the activity before and after you have a little bit of a buffer to let’s say, go on a walk, take a stretch break. Or one of my favorites is meditation. And that kind of leads me to the next tip,

 

which is to engage in a meditation practice. If you don’t already, do you meditate? Is that a part of yours? Yeah. So I meditate and pray, and that is, I actually start every Monday morning. That way I don’t feel like I need to as much throughout the day, but when I’m coaching sometimes a big stretch day. So like an intensive day with the client,

 

I absolutely have to back away with zero stimulation, at least halfway through it to recharge it. Yes. And you know, I’d say for introvert specifically, what can cause us a lot of anxiety and strife is overthinking and you know, I have joked with people. Well, I think other people just under think, you know, like maybe I’m thinking enough and it’s fine,

 

but you know, sometimes I’m like, wait, there can be thoughts that are ruminating and you feel like your wheels are spinning and there isn’t a lot of traction and it’s not benefiting you in any way. So what meditation does is it acts as a way to clear the mental fog. And if there’s any confusion about what are the next steps in my life that I should take,

 

or do I want to go to this event? What do I want in my life? What do I want out of this event? You know, I really view it as being such a powerful tool to be in. And So many people use this tool, but are doing so wonderfully in their careers. It’s pretty much a best kept secret and it’s not exclusive to monks or to people and,

 

you know, praying contacts it’s really accessible to all of us. And a great way to introduce yourself to meditation is with a mindfulness meditation technique. So I call it the breath of four, four, four. It’s pretty easy to remember. And if you’re feeling stressed or feeling anxious, this could be a foreign event. Or before you go to sleep,

 

when you wake up, whatever that anxiety pops up, just taking a comfortable seat, rolling your shoulders back and just breathing in through the nose for four counts. And you can do this with me. I do this, I love doing this stuff. We’ll do it here. If you got listening with us, you Guys can do it right here on the podcast with us.

 

Okay. So if you’re driving eyes open, if you’re so breathing in through the nose for one, two, okay. See, this is why I’m addicted to yoga, Lots of yoga. So these techniques, these anxiety techniques, what’s so great about this particular show. I mean, they really aren’t just for introverts. These apply to all of us with a really high level high stimulus world.

 

And so those are certainly important, but I definitely can see why they’re so much more important to an introvert leader to be able to strategically think and thrive. And there’s so many different parts of being a leader in this space that require you to be articulate and, you know, be proactive and be that leader in that, in that area. But I certainly see how that could be a struggle as well.

 

When we are talking about leadership for introverts. One of the questions that I get all the time is from clients and podcast listeners in general and just across social media, is it as an introvert. I hear a lot from people that they feel like they need to be present on social media. They need to be doing Instagram lives or Facebook lives, or they need to be out there really in a raw live capacity.

 

But that is not within who they are as a person. And it may or may not actually align with the brand they’re building for their company. How do you recommend, or what tips do you have for introverts that really feel like they may or may not. I mean, this is a whole business strategy question, but just generally for them, let’s say they really do need to be active on social media.

 

They do need to be doing live streams. They do need to be guesting on podcasting, do need to be present. How did you help introverts approach those types of things that are completely out of their comfort zone and frankly, they don’t even want to do. Yeah. Okay. You bring up such a great point because I get this all the time with my clients as well.

 

I don’t want to be visible. I don’t want to be the center of attention, or I don’t want to take up more space than other people because why should I should let other people speak? And from a certain standpoint, it’s like, okay, we can rationalize and say, you know what? I don’t need to do that. So I won’t,

 

but that’s how you stay small. And when you become about something greater than yourself, which is the reason why you have a business, because it’s not just about you, this isn’t a big ego trip. You know, if it is then maybe rethink your entrepreneurship, ideally you’re driven by a mission that extends beyond yourself and a part of getting that mission out there and helping people is being visible.

 

So even though it’s uncomfortable, I will say repetition for effect. So I’ve hosted so many events. And before that I attended so many events. And what do you think it was like when I very first started? Was it seamless? Was it perfect? Was it credible? No, it was not. But I mean, and that’s kind of an extreme example.

 

You don’t need to attend a thousand events before you’re comfortable, you know, it’ll happen sooner, but then the more you do something, there will be so much dissonance. If you dislike it and you keep doing it. So you learn, Oh, I kind of like that part of it. And then over time there are studies that suggest that the more you see someone,

 

the more likely you are to like them. So these, there are studies that suggest this, like at the word hand, for, within your home environment, you know, ideally. Yeah. So it would make sense if the more you do something and you don’t do it with the intention about why have to, even the referrals I get to, I am in such a privileged place that I get to attend this event and learn about this topic and meet others who are also interested in learning.

 

Yeah. So I’m hearing you say, it’s basically the response to a question that we ask our clients, what will happen to your people. If you do not show up for them, what’s going to happen to them? Like what is going to happen to them? If you do not, if they don’t hear about your services, if they don’t hear about your offer,

 

if they don’t experience the transformation that you deliver within your book or your program or your mastermind or whatever it is, what’s going to happen to them. So I love that. And that certainly does put it in perspective because it has nothing to do with the leader themselves. It’s all about who they’re called to serve and change. And then the other thing I heard you say was that repetition is going to make it easier.

 

Each time you do it, you got to show up. It’s not about you. It has nothing do with you actually whatsoever. And it’s really going to get easier each time you do it. So I love those encouraging words and it is, it’s so important because every single entrepreneur is different. Everybody brings something different to the table and there’s nobody like you and nobody will be out there.

 

If you aren’t out there, you won’t be out there. And that’s a big thing. So kind of trying to transition this a little bit here. So we have these online events, right? Or we have the social media we’re out there and being present. But what we also know is it, regardless of all the social media in the world, posting that you’re doing,

 

what really builds business is relationships. Relationships are what increase sales, bring other people into your business, word of mouth, nothing builds a company like relationships. And so with these introverts, what tips do you have for introverts for actually networking and building relationships online? The yes. I mean, we can talk about, we could do a whole show on in-person networking events,

 

but you know, right now, what do you recommend as far as how to go in network remotely, how to reach out and make those first connections. How to go about doing that as an introvert. So many introverts myself included, tend to really thrive when it comes to communicating. One-on-one maybe it’s not our first choice to be on a stage, but you can get there if you want to be there.

 

Right? So I would say that, especially if you are wanting to ramp up your networking and you do feel, let’s say a bit of social anxiety or just don’t get your energy from that, then one way to start is by doing one-on-one networking experiences. So there are a few apps, including lunch club, Bumble, biz, and shaper. And those apps,

 

what they’ll do is they will match you with a new professional every week. And so you could meet up to five people and one week, if you choose to, and you know, you can meet with them from anywhere from 30 minutes to an hour, and you just never know where these conversations will go, but what’s great about them is that you don’t necessarily need to go out there and find someone,

 

you know, this person wants to connect. So there’s a little bit less of that factor of I’m going up to this person. Are they interested in connecting? I mean, chances are, if they’re out of virtual event, they probably are, but it’s more foolproof this way. And then let’s say, if you are interested in connecting with someone and you’ve attended a virtual event,

 

be that person who in the chat feature drops their LinkedIn link and says, Hey, I’d love to connect and invites people. So what I have found in my experience as an introvert and event hosts is it’s so gratifying to have people come to you. You know, when you’re the host or when you are extending an invitation, then it really does open doors for you that you wouldn’t necessarily know to open yourself.

 

And also attending events that have a specified networking portion. There are a lot of really great tools right now. You know, I’ve used icebreaker a lot. There’s also teleport and other different online one-on-one connection games where they could be an entire virtual event or they can be a component. But if you are looking to connect with people and don’t necessarily want to do it completely from scratch,

 

have a warm lead, so to speak, then that’s certainly one way to go about it. That is so smart. As we were driving into this section, I was thinking that you were going to share with us just how to send a cold message to somebody on LinkedIn, asking them to have virtual coffee. And I identify that. I was like,

 

gosh, that would be a really big thing. I imagine for an introvert, these tips are so good. And the fact that we’ll make sure all of these resources are shared in the show notes for you guys who are listening. So all these things from the shaper of the lunch club, but Bumble, biz, icebreaker, teleport, and obviously every place else where you can find Stephanie,

 

we’re going to make sure they’re on the show notes for you guys. Stephanie, thank you so much for your time today. This is a great show and it isn’t a topic we’ve really hit on very much. I think we had a show about introvert entrepreneurship about three years ago. And I still remember that realizing that there are so many different aspects of leadership that truly need to be approached in a different manner for different types of leaders.

 

And, and I love that this is your area of expertise, so thank you so much. And then also for our listeners that are like, Oh my gosh, this is me. You know, she’s speaking my language. They Kevin’s talk a little bit about, you have a help sheet that we’re going to include in the show notes here about the working remotely resources sheet.

 

Is that, is that include some of the resources you’ve mentioned or what are our listeners going to get out of that bonus to this episode? Yes. Okay. I’m so glad that you’re asking about that. So that is just an easy one page cheat sheet of different tactics from my networking remotely webinar, but also we did touch on a few of them in this call as well.

 

So yeah, I would certainly say if you’re interested in just a refresher from this conversation and to perhaps learn about new concepts as well, that can help you in your online networking journey, then you’ll want to go to Stephanie toma.com/freebie and that Stephanie T H O M a.com. Perfect. Perfect. And then for Stephanie’s coaching programs, we’ll make sure a link to her coaching program is in that is in the show notes for this episode as well.

 

Stephanie, thank you so very much, any last words you’d like to leave for our introvert founders and CEOs listening to this episode? Yes. So I would like to leave everyone with just the sentiment that if you are listening to this podcast and thinking, you know, it seems a little bit of a reach. I’m not sure if I a leader, I Know that I’m an introvert,

 

but I don’t, you know, the thing’s kind of stretchy for me, just knowing that having the desire to lead and having a mission greater than yourself is the first step. And I truly believe that everyone can lead once you have that clarity of what you want to stand for and lead with that’s so, so good. Thank you so much, Stephanie.

 

We really appreciate you. Yes. Thank you for having me April<inaudible>. Thank you so much for tuning into today’s show. Again, this was Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, episode number 202, and Stephanie Toma was our expert guests today on the show to find all of the resources that we talked about, including how to find Stephanie’s networking, remotely strategy sheet, all of the apps that she mentioned on today’s show ways that you can work with Stephanie and she can help you walk into your authentic leadership and how to get your hands on Stephanie’s new book,

 

please cruise to Sweetlife co.com. And this is episode number 202. I’ll see you soon. Have a great week. You guys

Episode 199: How To Love Your Business Financials To Create The Life You Want – Megan Dahle and April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

Episode Bonuses:

Megan Dahle’s FREE 36-Page E-Book: Getting Your Money Right

Who This Episode is Great For:

Established entrepreneurs (in all Phases of my Start To Scale Up Business System”) who want to stop being scared of the money and start taking control.

Summary:

You either love or hate to talk about money in your business. In fact, most entrepreneurs run and hide when it comes to financial ledgers. But on today’s show, we’re gonna make you love the money and control it. Getting your money right in your business is the best feeling ever, and the first step to getting a company that’s going to scale, grow, and give you what you really want in business and life.
This week we’re diving in with guest expert, accountant and CFO Consultant, Megan Dahle, and talking about where you are now, understanding where you want to be, and making sure you’re on the right path to get there. We do this by teaching you the simple three numbers you need to know that will give you the power, confidence, and control you seek.

Highlights:

  1. Understand why you need to name your money
  2. Get clarity on the dangers of reinvesting every dime into your business
  3. Know the most important number that you really need to pay attention to
  4. Get a simple routine to look at your numbers without being scared

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome back. This is sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast, episode number 199. And yes, spoiler alert next week is our 200th podcast episode. And there’s some really cool stuff.

So make sure you’re subscribed. So you don’t miss out on that today. We are talking about how to love your business financials. So, first of all, if you clicked on this episode, then you’re pretty brave because the reality is that you either love to talk about money or you hate to talk about money in your business. And in fact, most entrepreneurs run and hide when we’re talking about financial ledgers,

but on today’s show, we’re going to dive in to make you love your money and take control of it. Getting your money right in your business is seriously. One of the best feelings ever really start to pay yourself. You’re paying valuable team members. Nothing feels better than that, but then we need to take it a step further. Is your business actually going to give you the life that you want.

First, we have the business foundations and financials that need in place, but today we’re talking about your life. How do we have the company generate enough money? And what do we need to do to get your life, to look the way that you want it to? And today’s guest expert, Megan Dali is here to talk about all of that. So the reality is let’s face it.

You either don’t understand the money in your business, or you have zero control of your cashflow, or you’ve done a really great job getting your financial systems in place. And now you’re ready for the next level either way. This is a great episode for you to tune into entrepreneurs. Don’t inherently come wired as accountants, as a matter of fact, most entrepreneurs are creatives.

And so when it comes to these types of systems, you might run the other direction. So that’s why today’s a really important show. And these are the things we’re covering on today’s episode. At the end of this episode, you’re going to know why you need to name your money and what exactly that means. You are going to get clarity on why it might be dangerous to always reinvest your profit back into your business.

So raise your hand. If every time you make goes back into your company, raise your hand. If every time you make those back into your company, but you also pay yourself a little bit. We’re going to talk about why both of those are not good, even though everybody does it and how to start changing that pattern. So you can reach your long-term business goals and we’re diving into important things like the number one number that you should pay attention to.

And why Megan says you don’t have to know all the numbers. We’re not getting into financial accounting lingo here. You’re just going to walk away understanding the most important number that you should know and a simple routine to look at your numbers on a regular basis, to make sure that you are on the right track. And let me introduce you to Megan here,

she’s our guest expert today, and she’s a doll you’re going to love her 15 years in a Megan Dolly’s corporate accounting career. A business owner reached out to her Megan privately because she was worried that one of the partners was taking more of their fair share. After looking at the books, Megan discovered that the partner had in fact taken $400,000 out of the account without the other partner,

knowing it was this sensitive project that was a launching pad for Megan. She is now a consulting CFO who creates light bulb moments inside her client’s businesses. And she makes the numbers easy for you to understand more importantly, easy for you to use so that you can learn how to grow your business stronger and make sure you’re generating cash and that it’s producing long-term wealth benefits for you.

So let’s go ahead and tune into today’s episode. Again, all of the show notes and the resources make it has here for us can be found by visiting Sweetlife co.com. This is podcast number 199. And if you haven’t yet, please take a second to leave us a review on Apple podcasts and share this episode with your friends, other business owners who really need to take control of their financial numbers as well.

Okay, let’s go.<inaudible> All right. You guys are welcome to the show. I am here with Megan Dolly, and today we’re talking about money. We always talk about goals and so many other podcasts talk about goal setting, but what are really comes down to is actually looking at the numbers, then the path that you’re on to make it happen.

And so that’s why I’m so excited to have Megan on the show today, because this is her area of expertise. And before she introduces herself, I wanted to read something to you that she sent to me, which is why I knew she absolutely had to be here on the show, talking to you guys today. She said light bulb moments are my favorite thing.

When my clients finally see what the numbers mean, it’s like watching. One of those videos were colored by blind people, put on those special glasses and can see color for the first time. It’s magical. Those magical moments have appeared in many parts of my life. And that’s how I know I’m on the path God has designed for me. Things that start by devastate is devastating.

Disaster is turned into something beautiful. And these transformations, these transformations that make me believe that all things are possible. And so Megan is absolutely an expert. She has crazy credentials, which I’ve already read for you, but what’s so important when we bring experts on the show is understanding the why behind what you do, not only what your Ninja zone of geniuses,

but the why behind. And so I wanted to share that with you guys before we, we dove into talking to Megan today. So Megan, take a minute and introduce yourself to our audience and tell people a little bit about you and how you got to be what you’re doing Today. Sure. Well, thanks so much April for letting me come on your show.

It’s amazing. I love how many shows you’ve done your consistency. The content is like, Oh my gosh, this is stuff I actually use. Like I’ve actually implemented stuff from your podcast. And so it was no brainer that I wanted to be on this show. So I’m a small town girl. I’m from Midwest, South Dakota. I like gardening. I have my kids.

I work with the marching band at the high school. I like to volunteer there. Yeah. And the numbers are my game. Numbers are my jam. I’ve just always seen them differently. Math always came easily. And my math teachers are like, your brain just works different. I love that. Yeah. You have to have a special gift to see numbers differently.

I do not have that gift nor to any of my children. So there you either have it or you don’t. I think. And, and so we’re grateful for people like you. So how do you work with clients? Primarily you have this amazing framework that you’ve created to help entrepreneurs and business owners make sure that they’re on the right path and that they’re going to achieve their goals.

I mean, this is a tangible framework and we’re going to dive into it today, which I’m so excited to on this show. Yeah. So the whole thing is that people are scared of their numbers or they don’t know what it means. They’re timid around them conversations with their bookkeeper and their accountant. Don’t go so well because they’re using that chart in the depreciation,

but you’ve been a, the, you know, those revenues Rose, it’s almost like they don’t want you to be asking questions, right? I’m going to use some jargon. So you just stop asking me questions. What I want to get to is what’s useful for you. I mean, you don’t need to know the ins and outs of your financial statements.

What’s actually useful. That’s going to help you make good decisions that you can have confidence in and know why you made those decisions and see the progress down the road. So it’s breaking it down into what would be a need. Right? Right. And your framework that you share, and you have a book about this, we’re going to, we’re going to let everybody know how to find you is number one,

where are you in identifying that number two is where do you want to go? Where do you want to be? And that’s the one we’re really diving in here today, which I’m super excited about. And then the third one is, Hey, you know, are you really on the right path to get there? So guide us into that second part of how,

how do you protect your goals? How do you identify, you know, really what is it going to take for me to get that beach house or send my kids to college or, you know, sell my company or whatever that is. How do you work with clients to understand that? Yeah. So it’s like the second half of goal making that is completely missing.

People don’t want to talk about the math part of the goals because it’s scary math or they forget about it or, or they’re more about it’ll come set the goal, set your vision board and it’ll come. I’m more about, well, let’s go get it. Let’s not wait for anything. Let’s not sit around and wait for it, but let’s actually quantify it and then go get it.

So it’s like, yes, I want that beach house or yes, I want to sell my business for X amount so I can retire with that cash. That’s great. Now let’s put a number on it. Let’s put a date on it. And where are we at compared to that? So we can go and get that progress. What happens when you don’t do this is that you make progress towards your goals,

but you might not recognize it. And so you take that progress and you reinvest it in your business, or you use that progress towards, Oh, some other expenses that might come up or the next shiny object. And then it’s like, your three-year goal is still your three-year goals, six years down the road. Wow. That is so true. That is exactly what business owners do.

So we think that that progress that we made financially, you know, instead of putting it to maybe what you’re saying is this in goal, they just automatically invested back in the company, which could be great. Or maybe it’s not what they should be doing with that. Yeah. That’s really fascinating. Oh yeah. Thank you. Yeah. So curiosity,

I love it. When business owners get curious and they start experimenting with things, but it’s also important to like have a, if you want to be curious and experiment, that’s great. Let’s have money that’s designated specifically for that, but let’s not be taking all of our progress and throwing it at this next shiny object. Yeah. Okay. So being proportionate about what you invest,

where each time you get each time you make progress, whatever that is. So if you have 20, $30,000, instead of reinvesting all that say, okay, we’re going to put 10 to this and then, you know, 20 or 30 to that. Interesting. Okay. So super interesting. So step number one is really quantifying how much it’s going to cost for you to get to that goal and really drilling down on those requirements.

And I think that alone, like we could just end the show here. How many of you guys listening to the show have actually sat down? And I know you all have thought about what you want because you’re entrepreneurs and we’re creative. And that’s what we do. How many of you have actually sat down and crunched the numbers to figure out what it’s actually going to cost for you to get there?

Connect with us, like send us a DM on Instagram Sweetlife podcast and let us know if you’ve actually crunched the numbers. And we’ll do like a little poll on our Instagram story on this with the week. This show airs, because I guarantee you, I mean, tell me Megan, how many people actually that come to your, like, this is going to cost me a million dollars.

I’ve had one client in my five years. I’ve had one, one that’s like had everything set up and she’s like, I know exactly how much I want for my daughter’s wedding. I know how much I want for my retirement. I will know how much I want for Beneta da. Great, awesome. That was so cool to come across. It’s like,

all right, let’s work on the next step. You’ve got this covered, right? That’s right. Yeah. Okay. So yeah, it’s a 90% of people will not have that 99.9% of people will not have that. Okay. So after somebody identifies really how much, what that’s going to cost the next step you say is really assessing their progress towards that.

Is there a certain frequency in which a business owner should stop and take a look that you recommend financially about how they’re doing? Is that quarterly? Is it monthly? Is it yearly? Is there a routine that you recommend entrepreneurs are in assessing, not their monthly? I mean, this is not a show about monthly operational costs. This is a show about where I am,

as opposed to where I want to be in my future. Right. So if it’s set up correctly, you’ll just be able to look and see, okay. Part of it is just taking that money out and hiding it from yourself in a special place. That’s either getting interest or invest in somehow to protect that progress and maybe do some work for you on the side while you’re not watching.

So I’ve lost my train of thought a second. When you triggered something, when you said it’s it’s mom mode, it’s our mom brain. No, what I was saying was I feel like as business owners, if somebody is like 30th of every single month, you should do this every single quarter. Should you do this? So I think that entrepreneurs,

you know, we’re super creative people, but when somebody gives us a system, we love systems. We geek out on systems too. So do you have a consistent system where you say to your clients, Hey, we’re going to have a, check-in call every quarter and make sure that your money’s moving, where it needs to be, and you’re still on track or we need to assess what’s happened so far or just regular,

like a routine that you recommend businesses really pay attention and reassess. Yeah. I actually have only a few numbers that I want my people to pay really close attention to. Because if I tell them to, you know, start pull your financial statements every month, it’s one of those things that, eh, I got it, they pull up, open an income statement,

they look at the bottom line. They’re like, yep, that’s about right. And they move on, right? It has no meaning to them. So I actually pick a few numbers, like one that you might need to watch weekly and other that you’ll want to look at monthly and another, that you’ll want to look at quarterly just to make sure that things are going along the way that they need to be.

And we’ll do that deep dive, more quarterly. But one of the most important, one of the most telling numbers is your 60 day cash in 60 days, how much cash am I going to have in the bank to run my business? And then we make sure that what we’re taking out and protecting isn’t going back in and what we’re taking out and protecting isn’t hurting the business.

Cause that’s, you know, you don’t want to be taking out too much cash. And when you can see what your cash balance is going to be in 60 days or other types of business, if you’re like retail and you have busy seasons, we actually take that out much farther. They want to know where the cash is going to be. Cause that’s the blood.

We don’t want to be donating blood if we can’t afford it. Right. Right. Right. So smart. And so the next thing you say is to name the cash before it comes in, let’s talk a little bit about that. What do you mean by that? So once we have that cash projection created, we know what we think our cash is going to be coming in for the next couple months.

And now that we think we know what that cash is, we’re going to have a purpose for it because if we don’t have a purpose for it, what’s really easy to do is to spend it. If we don’t know at that way, coming in as man, those coaching programs, the advertising, the marketing, all it’s, it’s sexy and it’s fun and it’s,

it’s new and it’s novel. So we actually name it like, okay, we know that next week we should have about 2000 coming in. And two weeks after that we have 4,000 coming in and then we know where it’s going out in terms of expenses. We know where it’s going out in terms of the progress towards our goals. And we know what’s being set aside for a little sandbox fund cash and owe taxes.

Don’t forget about taxes. I do taxes and taxes yet. So you actually say Before it comes in, so you know where it’s going versus where somebody like myself, I have a tendency to not just name the money to actually spend the money before it comes in. So in my mind, I’ve already and I don’t actually spend the money, but I think maybe I do that.

So in my mind, it’s already saying this money is coming here for this. This money is going to this and it’s not like robbing Peter from pain, Paul, but I definitely know where my money is going well before it gets here. And so I feel like I’m doing good, according to what you say in that area. Although I’m sure that the categories in which I named my money could use some work.

And like you were saying, so you’re saying taxes, of course, business operations. And you’re saying that we really need to pay attention to the 60 day cashflow. And that is the key numbers are our listeners should be paying attention to, is that correct? Yes, that’s right. And on that cashflow, you’ll see the different categories. You’ll see,

like the marketing that one can get out of hand really quick. You’ll see the tax and all of those buckets, because truth is to get a little bit accounting, jargon ish on you, not everything that is cash out actually appears on your income statement. So your income statement might show that you’re showing have a profit, but cash is like, did you know that you paid yourself?

And did you know that you had these debt service payments? And there it goes, what you thought was your free cash flow. Right. Okay. And I’m sure this happens all the time. It’s just why people need somebody like you to make sure that you’re helping them protect their assets. So the third step you say is protecting this actual progress. So as businesses,

they have their structure in place or they’re getting their structure in place. What does it take to actually do that and put that structure in place so that the money is accumulated in the appropriate buckets so that they can reach their goals. How do you put this structure in place for your clients? So I have a really easy Excel tool in all my clients have to do is put in their bank balance.

At the top of that tool, like open up the bank balance today, it says $7,500. And it will tell them exactly what to do with that $7,500. If something’s going to stay in the business, if something is going to be moved to pay themselves and put it in their pocket, or if something is for their goals specifically for that, and going to move directly to,

I work with a lot of like personal finance people, like go put that in that account over there and your personal finance, personal take care of it. If they don’t have a personal finance person, I’m like, go put this in your savings account, your money market, account, your investment account, and just let it be happy over there. All by itself will take care of itself,

right? Who are The primary clients that you work with? I work with creative females primarily, and between being told that you’re creative and between being told that you were a woman you’re generally taught from a very young age, that numbers aren’t for you. And so when it comes to those conversations and showing people visually how this works so they can get that shift of,

Oh, this isn’t hard. I totally get this. I’m smart enough. I’m good enough. And now I feel like I am a true business person. I feel like I’m in control of my business. It’s really cool. Yeah. Super. It feels super powerful. It’s such a rush when yeah. I think as, as women, as men,

they just are expected to, but as women, when we finally take control of the numbers, it’s such a, such a feeling of, I don’t like to use the word empowered because it’s so overused, but this is a perfect instance in which she used that. And so I love, absolutely love what you do. So now I’m going to put you on the spot and I didn’t prepare you to ask these questions,

but I really want to know what are your favorite books for women founders when it comes to being smart about money? Do you have, besides your own? So let’s talk about your book, you know, getting your money. Right. I know that I hear a lot of people whose agenda and Cheryl’s book, you’re a, bad-ass at making money, which is more mindset around money.

It’s not money strategy. I personally actually loved that book. Are there any other books or resources that you recommend that our listeners who might not have a healthy relationship with money in the first place can use to kind of dive into reset their perspective? Yeah. So profit first was transformative for me. Mike McCullough is a great guy. And when it comes to bank balance accounting,

he’s the King and that’s what we’re doing and using what he has built and expanding on it. He’s really good. He’s really funny. If you listen to his books, listen to it on two X and he’s hysterical the other, I’m actually going to stand up and get the author’s name cause I can hear it. Oh, I love it. Thank you.

And then we’ll make sure you guys that we are sharing, we’re sharing these resources in the show notes too. Along with Megan spoke to one of the things that I know that businesses struggle with is just understanding the fundamentals of money. And it’s really interesting. I have a lot of clients that are CPAs and that are accountants and you know, that are finance coaches.

And it’s interesting to see as we’re helping our finance coaching clients build their business, how they approach scaling their business online and developing their coaching service versus our other businesses because they already know. So a part of the strategy is also part of the structure and the foundation of the money. It is that profit first approach. And it’s a beautiful thing as a business development coach,

you know, to go through and watch. And they’re saying, okay, well, this is the way this is going to be. And they’re very, they’re very strategic about that as far as being entrepreneurs themselves. So I, I love to ask these kind of behind the scene questions like about your own business and how do you do this and what are some of the resources that you love for your own business?

Just because I think that teaches a lot as well. So what was this other book? Cunningham has a couple of really great books. His blueprint to a successful business is like, this is why you need to understand the numbers in your business and how they make you incredibly profitable when you understand them. And he’s also not about all of the nitty gritty bits and pieces of the numbers.

It’s just the overall picture of how it flows together and how it works. Yes. Awesome. Cool. Thank you so much for sharing those. Okay. So in closing today, we have talked about how to not only protect your goals, but how to actually make your goals come to fruition because you are quantifying them to figure out the importance of how much your goals and what that looks like is going to cost you.

We talked about the importance of actually assessing your progress on a regular basis and naming the cash before it comes in and making sure that you are hiding and you’re protecting your money and you are not giving 100% of your profit back into your business that you’re pulling out these small chunks of this. And that’s a really big deal, I think for a lot of our listeners as well,

because especially in the first five years of business, like every dime they make, they put back in, and that does, you’re saying that’s a risk factor of, you’re just putting off that amount of time to even start working on their personal goals. Is that correct? That’s right. Yep. They need to start getting rewarded for the work that they do,

change your relationship with your business. Yeah. And then in your book, this ebook, you have getting your money, right. What does that look like? What are some of the things that our readers can expect to really learn from you in that book? So there are three types of numbers that you need to know in your business. There is the number that tells you,

where am I at? Like, where am I even at relative? How did I get here? What direction am I facing? When, where am I? And the second one is, well, hang on a second. Where do I want to be? And that’s the quantifying, this is what I want my from my business. This is how I want it to serve me.

And then the numbers that tell you, are you on the right path? Are you doing the right activities or does something need to shift? Do we need to take a detour in what those different numbers look like and how you can find them? Great. And so you’re going to, you’re going to dive in and guide our listeners through that process. Megan,

thank you so much for being on the show today. I appreciate your expertise and your wisdom and your sense of humor and just really making this so much more fun than I think that entrepreneurs experience a lot of times when we talk about money and being so real about the fact that you don’t have to know all the nitty gritty terminology, but these are the basic three numbers you need to know.

And our listeners can find out more about that by downloading your free book, which we will make sure there is a link to that in the show notes of this episode and where else can our listeners find you Come on over to Meghan dolly.com or connect with me on Facebook. I love conversations to begin to sit back and have 15 minutes of coffee together, sometime if you want,

Love that. Okay, perfect. We’ll make sure that those links are in the show notes. Thank you so much for being a guest. Oh, thank you so much, April. This was fun. Yes. Appreciate you.<inaudible> Thanks so much for tuning into this show. Here is a reminder that you can get all of the notes that we talked about today,

including all of the bonuses and strategies by visiting Sweetlife co.com episode one 99. And if you are in a place where you’re ready to develop your signature offer or your program now is a time to get in through pre-registration by joining our wait list for our, your signature offer and program masterclass coming in 2021, I would love to work with you and extract your expertise to create your intellectual property,

to make you be this beautiful leader and your space to learn more about our, your signature offer masterclass, simply visit signature offer.com. I’ll talk to you next week. We have episode number 200 coming right at you and almost four years of Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. Rolling out so excited and you appreciate so much have a great week.

Episode 197: Will Your Service, Course, or Program Sell? – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab the cheatsheets and a 6-minute video to get started building your Signature Offer.

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for experts, entrepreneurs and businesses who:
A) Want to know more about creating your Signature Offer
B) Want to launch an online course, program or service
C) Want to make sure what you build is a needed commodity 

Summary:

This show is part of a series called: How To Create Your Signature Offer™, Program, Course, Service or Process. In this episode we’re talking about how to know if your new service, program or course will sell? 
 
 Is it really needed and will people actually buy it? 
 
So if you’ve been working on building your first online course, corporate program, service or offer, today’s show will help you determine the need and make smart decisions to scale your business faster. 

Highlights:

  1. Know how to assess market demand
  2. Get clarity on how to make your offer stand out
  3. Determine if you should move forward or scratch the plan

Resources Mentioned:

Download the CheatSheetMust-Have Components of Every Leading Signature Offer or Program plus get a quick 6-minute video overview when you Join the Waitlist to create Your Signature Offer™, Program or Process.
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hey there. And welcome back to I’m April beach. Thank you for tuning in with me this week. This is the fourth episode in the series that we’ve been doing called how to create your signature offer program,
service or process. And so for the last three episodes we’ve been talking about what is a signature offer or a signature program, a signature course, how to differentiate yours, how to create it using the assets you already have and how to make sure that your business can really stand out as the undisputed leader in your space by creating a signature service in today’s episode is the wrap up of those four.
This is episode number 197. So when you’re referencing looking for the show notes and things I’m going to talk about here today, you can always cruise over to Sweetlife co.com, click on the podcast and simply find episode number one 97. Today, we’re talking about how to know if your service program or course will sell. And we’re going to dive into some questions and some strategies that you can go through.
I’m going to guide you through that so that you can get clarity to know whether or not what you’re creating is actually worth it. And for you who are listening. And you’re like, yes, I want to lead in my space. I’m ready to scale my offline business online. I’m ready to launch my program or course, make sure you go grab the cheat sheets that I have for you.
And a six minute video on how to get started building your signature program over@signatureoffer.com. You can also join the wait list for my next master class called how to create your signature program and offer on that page as well. So I wanted to make sure that you knew that those tools were available to you, and you can go grab those right away. So who is this particular episode for this episode is for experts,
entrepreneurs, and small businesses who a, you either want to know more about creating a signature program or offer B, you want to launch an online course or an online coaching service or an online program, or C you just want to make sure that what you’re about to build, isn’t going to be bunk. Isn’t going to be a total waste of your time.
And you might be asking yourself, is this really needed? Are people actually going to buy this? So if you’ve been working on building, maybe your first online course developing a corporate program or a service or an offer today’s show is going to help you determine the need and make sure that you’re making smart decisions to scale your business faster. And of course,
time is money. And so today’s show is going to save you both of those. And at the end of this episode, you’re going to know how to assess your market for demand. You’re going to get clarity on how to make your offer stand out. And you’re going to determine if you should move forward or fully scratched the plan and save yourself time and not do that.
So I’m excited to dive into this conversation with you. Let’s do it.<inaudible> Okay, guys, we’re continuing our conversation in this four part series on how to create your signature program offer process course or service. And for the last month we’ve been talking about what is a signature program. You know, we hear all the time businesses saying, Oh, this is going to be my signature offer.
And we’ve covered in these episodes. Really? What is a signature offer? And just a little short recap. I do want you to need into those episodes. If you’re landing here the first time, those are episodes number one 94, one 95 and one 96, but just a short little recap, not every offer is a signature offer, just because you say it’s a signature offer,
there are specific things which is taking your thoughts, your intellectual property, and turning that into your methodology that becomes a foundation for your signature offer. So if you haven’t listened to those episodes, definitely go back. Cause it’s going to be a really powerful springboard for what we’re talking about today, which of course is how to determine if the signature program or offer you are about to create,
will actually sell. So this show, again, wraps up this whole entire series. And I wanted to make sure that you knew that all of it is available there for you. It’s a perfect way to wrap up this series because obviously we want to work smarter and not harder. We also want to make sure that you’re leading your space. So let me go ahead and start out with a story so that you know,
that if you’ve created something that hasn’t sold before you are not alone, I had this genius idea. I’m sure it was a genius idea. It was 2009. And I decided that we needed to have a website, which was a resource where all these parent coaches could come together. And I spent thousands of dollars building this website and recruiting different businesses to be found on this website,
paid my designer and it totally flopped on its face because I just wanted to create it because I felt like the industry needed it. There was no plan behind it. It was just April being creative and also April losing like $10,000 and a whole bunch of time. So the problem that we have as thought leaders and as creators is that the joy is in the building.
Most entrepreneurs have a bunch of ideas and oftentimes we’re so damn excited about what we’re about to do. We don’t even take time to research whether or not it will actually take off. Now, once you get a little bit more wrinkles and a lot gray hair in years, go by, you know, maturity combines with creativity. You get smarter and exponentially more profitable,
but you know, if you’d rather not wait for the gray hair and saggy boobs, that is why we are talking about this on today’s show. You are welcome in today’s episode, I’m going to give you questions to research, to know whether or not your product will sell. It’s like Pat Flynn calls it in his book, will it fly? And these questions,
there are six of them. So if you’re driving your car, you might want to get a little scratch piece of paper out. Or of course you can always replay this on all of your podcasts, listening devices and visit our show notes for this episode. But these questions are going to give you super insight into whether or not what you’re creating is really worth your time.
So let’s go ahead and dive in. So I’m going to go through these six questions and jam a little bit on each one to give you a little bit more background and insight about them. And then we’re going to talk about how to combine these six questions with what we have discussed and the business trainings that I’ve delivered on the last couple of podcasts to truly give you the gold and the answer that you need for moving the creation or the launch of your program or service forward.
Okay. So let’s dive right in question number one, what is your ideal client’s biggest problem as it relates to your specialty? And let me jam on this question a little bit, and then I’ll repeat it for you. Especially if you’re taking notes, we oftentimes talk about the solution. We create your product, your offer. That is the focus of our discussion and today’s podcast episode is the solution.
What you need to ask yourself is what is the problem I am solving and is the solution that I’m creating, solving a specific problem for my ideal client, certainly as it relates to your specialty. So you need to be able to answer the question very clearly. What is my ideal client’s biggest problem. As of course, it relates to your area of expertise.
So question number one is really hammering that out. And again, the clarity this is going to give you is, is what I am about to propose as my signature program solving this biggest problem. You might be able to stop right there and just say, Hey, you know what? I don’t think it’s hitting their biggest problem. And this is enough.
There you go. Edit it and fix it. So that’s question number one, question number two. What solutions are currently in the market? Now? This is a competitive analysis question, but I, when you’re talking about competitors, most businesses automatically think, Oh, I have to find everybody in my space that is just like me, every other program or a or service or in my geographic area.
One of the things I want you to think about is there are times when other business models provide the same solution that you do. So for example, if somebody’s biggest problem is they don’t know how to create a backyard garden. They can either, or a company to help them come in and do it that, or they can read a magazine. If you’re the company that’s great in a signature program about how to create the most amazing backyard vegetable gardens.
You need to know that one of your competitors or another place that they might be looking could be a local magazine. So just realize that when we’re talking about competitive analysis, it isn’t always what looks exactly like or close to what you’re about to create. It’s other places your clients are going for the same answers to their problem. So question number two is what solutions are currently in the market.
Question number three, what is actually selling now? Obviously you’re not going to be able to get into the back of the numbers of local competitors or similar businesses, but do your best at trying to determine, is this something that people are actually buying right now side note, just because somebody has thousands of Instagram followers doesn’t mean they make a lot of money.
I think that hopefully this, this year, everybody has realized that the number of Instagram followers you have has no correlation at all to how profitable your company is. Just a little side note. So what is currently selling right now? And don’t go to Instagram to see how many great looking posts they have that just figure it out. You can ask people in your market,
you can ask potential clients. Maybe I have purchased a service that could be a competitor of yours. Why they chose to do that question number four, what is missing? You see what is the need that has not been met? I still don’t know. I remember my favorite class in high school and no, I did not go to school very often in high school.
I was pretty much dishing school, but I never missed missing Holloway’s entrepreneurship class. I was there every day, single week, this guy was amazing. And he always said whole bunch of things like small businesses. Beautiful. But yeah, he always was saying, find that need, look for what people are craving. And sometimes it’s hard, but not for you creatives.
You can see right through that. If you really look hard, you can see what’s missing and it might not be the solution. That’s right. Seeing that maybe what’s missing is how it’s being delivered. Maybe what you’re proposing to launch as a signature service or program is very similar to what somebody else already has. But what might be missing is a way in which it’s administered or delivered the business model.
Okay. Question number five is, will your offer fill an unmet or under met need? This is a basic thing. You know, business one Oh one guys, we have to make sure that there’s a market for it. And people are going to buy it. That means you either need to be solving a problem or fulfilling a desire that people are willing to pay you for.
Okay. I can move on after that one. Number six, why are you uniquely qualified to create and to deliver this offer, you need to be able to answer that and you should be able to answer it for yourself. The answer to this question is also the solution to what a lot of, especially female entrepreneurs struggle with with imposter syndrome, like feeling like you aren’t enough or feeling like you’re never good enough.
And I just know, cause I’m a woman. I know a lot of women struggle with that. And I have certainly struggled with that as well. This answer to this question, why are you uniquely qualified to create, deliver this offer is like the hammer that shatters that totally not true last wall, right? You need to be able to look at yourself and say,
what have I been through? What is my story? What is, what have I walked through? What education have I received? What you know, on the job training and certification hours and hours performing this type of act, whatever it is, service consulting, what is that? And you need to hold that true. And you need to hold that close,
especially as you are creating a signature program, because nobody sees things like you do. Nobody provides solutions the way you do, especially when you have a history with that. So ask yourself and please make sure that you give yourself grace in this because you might fumble through it a little bit and you might not actually know the answer to this question and that’s okay,
but for sure, ask yourself, why are you uniquely qualified to create and deliver this offer? And when you answer these questions, it’s going to give you clarity on whether or not you should move forward and build and create your signature program or service. So let me summarize these questions. One more time. Number one, what is your ideal client’s biggest problem as it relates to your specialty?
Number two, what solutions are currently in the market? Number three, what is selling number four? What is missing? Number five, will your offer fill an unmet or under met need? And number six, why are you uniquely qualified to create and deliver this offer? Now know the answers to these questions alone are not enough to give you a total full insight into whether or not you should move forward in building this offer.
But these questions combined with what we did on last week show, which is sweet life entrepreneur podcast. Number one 96 are literally worth their weight in gold and will give you complete clarity on whether or not you should move forward or run the other direction. And don’t keep going. So today’s questions combined with one 96 are going to give you that foundation and that confidence to know whether or not you should move forward and building and creating,
launching, developing your signature program or offer. So let’s do a big rate cap over the last four weeks. We’ve been talking about creating your signature offer program course or service. And most companies start with the actual business model. Like literally I hear people say, I want to launch an online course, or I want to launch a membership site, or I want to develop a corporate benefits program,
or I want to create a certification program that is the business model of your signature method. You first need to start with outlining your intellectual property in creating a predictable transformational result that becomes the content and it becomes your methodology that gives people Results literally, I talked to businesses all the time. Then I just got off the phone with another really fabulous woman out of New York.
And I spoke to her last week and she’s like, gosh, I have been creating this course forever. And she’s so qualified to do it, but there was something in the way of actually just building the course. And it’s because she hadn’t gone through the process of actually extracting her ideas out of her brain and dropping them into organized buckets. If you will,
into a timeline or an outline that really can then become the business model, which is the course. And so I just want to share theirs first, going through this process, as we’re wrapping up this four part series, first, you create your intellectual property, your content, and then choose the business model. So you first want to start with that part and then choose a business model and how it will be delivered.
Again, a live course, a recorded course, a one on one coaching service, a group coaching service. You could be planning a retreat, a series of classes, corporate programs, sky’s the limit when it comes to the business model. And as a side note, if you have not yet, if you’re wondering about what business model, make sure that you download the ultimate guide to online business models that can be found right there on our website@sweetlifeco.com,
it’s a 14 page guide and it tells you every single online business model. So that’ll give you a lot of really good information there. And to summarize the last four podcasts, one 94, one 95, one 96 and one 97 are really powerful to get you started in the right direction, building your signature program or offer. So I know we discussed a lot of things.
I absolutely love you too need into this show. And I appreciate you guys so much. We’re almost at episode 200 and coming up on four years of the Sweetlife entrepreneurial business podcast and totally could not have done it without you liking this show and subscribing to this show and sharing the show with your fans. Our mission really is to deliver you proven, trusted business consulting and strategy that other business coaches charge thousands for.
This is our outreach and it’s our impact. And it’s the way we pour into the entrepreneur and the small business community first. And so I really appreciate you listening to the show and sharing it with your friends. And if you’re ready to totally knock it out of the park and become the undisputed leader in your space, you want help taking your thoughts, turning them into reality,
taking your intellectual property, outlining your methodology and turning it into your signature program or offer. Make sure you cruise over to signature offer.com and you can get information. You can add your name to the interest list to join my next masterclass. And of course, that’s also where I have the cheat sheet for you and the short little six minute video to get you started in the meantime that signature offer.com.
All right, you guys, thanks for tuning into the show. Next week, we have an awesome guest take Carney’s on the show and she’s helping you transition the mindset behind being the founder and doing it all. Just starting to delegate the processes so your businesses can scale. All right. Talk to you guys soon. Thanks so much. Bye bye. For now.

Episode 196: How To Use What You Already Have To Develop A Signature Program – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab the cheatsheets and a 6-minute video to get started building your Signature Offer.

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for experts, entrepreneurs and businesses who:
A) Want to know more about creating your Signature Offer
B) Want to understand the fundamentals of what a Signature Offer or Program really is and isn’t
C) Want to know how to get started in creating your company’s Signature Offer or Program and you’re wondering what to do first. 

Summary:

This show is part of a series called: How To Create Your Signature Offer™, Program, Course, Service or Process. In this episode we discuss the problem most entrepreneurs have as you struggle to organize your ideas thoughts and expertise into an outline for your offer program for service. So if you’ve been working on building your first online course developing your first membership community are creating your first steps of service and struggling with taking what’s in your mind and getting it out on paper and then building it into your business model this show is for you. 

Highlights:

UNDERSTAND HOW TO:
  1. Organize your ideas.
  2. Outline your first offer.
  3. Guarantee your clients results.

Resources Mentioned:

Download the CheatSheetMust-Have Components of Every Leading Signature Offer or Program plus get a quick 6-minute video overview when you Join the Waitlist to create Your Signature Offer™, Program or Process.
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Welcome to another episode on entrepreneur business podcast and April beach. Thanks so much for tuning in with me again this week, especially in this topic, I love talking about signature offers and programs, and some of the messages you guys have been sending me are so cool seeing what you’re building,
getting your questions. I love it. So, so thanks for your feedback and insert connecting with me even beyond this podcast today, we’re talking about how to organize your assets into a signature offer program or worse. This is the third episode in our series on how to create your signature service offer program or, or methodology we’ve been talking about what a signature offer actually is and what isn’t a signature offer.
We’ve talked about the two different kinds of signature offers that was in episode number 194. If you miss those, go back last week in episode number 195, we talked about the four prerequisites are the four things that you have to do before creating or even thinking about creating your signature offer. So make sure that you don’t miss those because they’re definitely a foundation for what we’re talking about here today.
And on this week’s show, we’re diving in more in discussing how to use your current assets to develop your signature offer or program. And again, this show is part of this series we’re doing on how to create your signature offer program service or process. And on today’s episode, we’re going to talk about the problem that most entrepreneurs have as you’re struggling to develop.
Your outline is you’re struggling to organize your ideas and your expertise into an outline that becomes your program or offer or service. So if you’ve been working on building your first online course and developing your first online membership community, or, you know, creating your first signature service, this is discussing the first steps. If you’ve been struggling with that outlining process. So today on the show,
we’re talking about how to take what’s in your mind and getting it out on the paper, but then getting it from that step and building it into the business model that you actually want. Last week, I received a phone call from a woman who has been working to outline her signature offer for her course, for a year and a half. This woman is absolutely an expert at what she does.
She’s super excited to launch her first online course, but like most creatives, she’s a business woman, but she’s still creating. She’s having difficulty staring at this black and white outline on a piece of paper and trying to figure out what am I really missing? And turning that outline into the magic that she knew it could be, and then taking it fully and actually building the course.
And so she was missing so many aspects of what she really wanted to include in her course. And the reason was because the process in which she was taught to outline her course was not ideal for the way her mind works. And so she was just like, is this okay? I want to do this a different way. Help me, does this make sense?
And this happens all the time. The hardest work you’re ever going to do as a business owner is strategic thinking. And the process of pulling your ideas, experiences, and expertise into creating this signature outline for your new online course or your new service, or you knew your new offer. It’s totally exhausting. And it can be incredibly difficult if you don’t have a system that works with the way your brain works.
Okay. Especially if you are a creative person and you need to see things. And so I have a system and I teach entrepreneurs and experts to extract their expertise and ideas and put it into an outline that becomes your signature transformation, whether that’s a course or a membership community, or a service or a corporate program. And today on the show, I’m going to teach you the very first step in the process to start being able to outline your offer.
And I wanted to share this with you in the phone call I got last week was just even more of an emphasis that I needed to talk about it on the show. So today we’re talking about how to organize your mind. All right? So once we take all of your expertise and we organize in your mind, that’s how we can pull it into your signature offer or program.
And at the end of this episode, you will understand how to organize your ideas, pull from your assets you already have. And so let’s chat about that for just a hot minute here. We don’t want you recreating the wheel from scratch. Creating your signature program, entails pulling from your assets and your expertise. You are ready. Have we want to take what you’ve already done in scale your business?
That’s what we talk about. We talk about scaling businesses. So we’re going to talk about organizing your ideas, outlining your signature offer, guaranteeing your client’s Results with your offer, but you’re going to understand the importance of pulling from your established assets. And like I said, that is how we scale your business. So whether you are a new company that’s going to offline to online,
or if you’re an established entrepreneur, that’s really wanting to launch your signature offer. We want to pull from everything you’ve done already. And that’s what we’re going to talk about on today’s show. So all of the show notes for this episode can be found by sweet life co.com. And you can click over on podcast. And of course, this episode of like our other episodes here in our series,
we’re talking about on how to create your signature offer program service or process comes with some serious, awesome bonuses for you guys. You can get them totally free. We have a cheat sheet to help, you know, the components of a true signature offer and a six minute video to get you kickstarted on building your signature offer. And if you are ready to take the lead,
you can add your name to the wait list to join my next signature offer development masterclass. That’s coming up. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode, but don’t forget to grab all those bonuses by visiting signature offer.com.<inaudible> Okay. Let’s go ahead and get started to help you outline your first signature offer and turn your thoughts and expertise into business reality.
In this process, I’m going to guide you through a process that I call your asset inventory. And here is the gold in this. This is why this is incredibly important. And I mentioned it in the intro. We have to take what you already have. We’re going to scale your business by creating your signature offer and to do so. We want to pull from your assets.
We don’t want to recreate the wheel a hundred percent. This is a process in which we inventory all of your expertise, the things you know right now, the things that you can turn into your signature offer and program right now, this is the golden it, okay, because here’s the deal. We literally don’t want to start you from scratch. If we’re starting from scratch,
it’s not a signature offer. It’s a first offer and we need to get you more experienced in that signature offers are for those of you guys that are ready. You’ve gotten people experience in different areas before you really, really ready to dive in. If you’re a new business and you’re launching a foundational signature offer, then this is a great way to figure out maybe what new first offer you would like to launch.
And I love helping experts launch their signature programs and scale their business with what you already have. So I totally geek out on this topic, and this is how we start. If you have a piece of paper and a pen, I highly recommend you take notes while I’m going through this episode. And you can even splash down out of your brain as I’m guiding you through the steps.
So here are the six steps to inventory your assets. And after you do that, then you are going to be teed up to outline your signature offer. That’s going to make you the undisputed leader in your space. So step number one is asking yourself the question, what can I deliver right now? So what are services that you already can deliver? You already are delivering.
What can you deliver to your people right now? Literally make a list on a piece of paper. What can you help people with right now, right now, right this second, it can be from cooking to walking the dogs, to developing a high level brand, to brewing beer. Literally, you’re going to splash down from your brain. Everything, not necessarily just as it applies to your business,
because sometimes seeing what you can do right now in all aspects of your expertise, create some of the most amazing signature offers with your spin on them that nobody else has. So step number one is asking yourself the question, what can I deliver right now? What can I do right this second today and teach somebody else how to do step number two, then you look at that list and you say,
what am I an expert at? What am I really, really, really good at from your first list? So first is what can you do right now? Step number two is what are you an expert at? And step number three is what do you feel most comfortable offering right now? So what do you literally feel the most comfortable with? If somebody,
if I came up to you tomorrow and I was like, Hey, Cindy, I really need help in this area. I heard you do these kinds of a variety of things. What would I say that would totally freak you out? And you don’t know if you could actually help me. We’re going to cross those off the list, but what could you tell me that you could help me with and be super comfortable helping me get results in that area?
Do you maybe need to work a little bit more on your process of giving me Results sure. Of course. That’s the process of developing your signature offer, but what are you feeling the most comfortable about offering right now in your business? I don’t care what anybody says. Your level of comfort totally matters. You want to feel confident and you want to feel comfortable moving forward.
Are you always gonna fill out a hundred percent confident? No. Sometimes you just have to take a big leap, but if there’s like a feeling inside you and you’re like, yeah, I just don’t feel right about this. Or I just don’t feel like this is the right direction. Listen to your voice inside. That’s telling you that. All right.
So what do you feel most comfortable offering right now based on the things that you can deliver right now and the things that you’re an expert at and step number four. What do you love so much that you would do it for free? Don’t freak out on me. I’m not telling you, you should offer your signature services for free. Most of you guys probably actually aren’t cause you’re my listeners and you love your business.
You love what you do. Half of you guys actually probably love that question, but what do you love so much that you would do it for free? What lights you up? I’ll tell you when I get off a call with a new client, who’s just shared their business ideas and goals and the things they’re struggling with. And I’ve been able to give them steps to move forward.
I am the happiest I ever am in my business. Nothing fires me up then talking to people. One-on-one I love it. I live for that. What in your business do you know, after you’re done doing it, you’re going to have a huge smile on your face because you’re just going to be like, this was so awesome. I love helping people that way.
And so we’re going down this list of asking again, first, what can you deliver right now? Number two, what are you an expert at? Number three? What are you comfortable with? Number four. What do you love so much out of all those that you would do it for free. And now here’s when the real hard work comes in because that’s all mind work and decision making here is when you need your piece of paper and your pen,
and you also need to give yourself a couple hours to do this. This is not fast work for some of you. It could take you a solid week of work to actually complete this process. And by the way, side note, this is a great thing to hire a VA to do for you. Step number five, what current offers, assets and deliverables do you have right now?
Basically, what are all the things that you have are already created? We’re going to take an asset inventory of everything that you’ve already created. What do I mean by that? I mean, everything, videos, not just paid videos, your Facebook live videos, your Instagram live videos, videos on your phone that you recorded, that you never put anywhere,
your articles, your current services, audio files that maybe you’ve put out into social media, PDF downloads, podcasts books that you have written or contributed to journals that you’ve kept over the years of ideas and things that you want to create and little outlines. And don’t tell me you don’t have a notepad or a trillion of them in your house with all your ideas.
Cause I know you do cause we all do right. Some of those ideas, you’ve never done anything with you wrote them in a notepad and they’re still sitting there aren’t they? So it’s time to inventory those assets. That’s your mind, that’s your goal? That’s your intellectual property. And those notebooks could be Evernote files. It could be little audio notes.
I literally leave a million audio recordings to myself on my iPhone. And I very, very rarely am great at going back and listening to them again. So it could be audio notes on your phone. Also, it could be many courses that you’ve created products that you’ve created and it could be infographics, different social media, graphics, branding, graphics, ideas of different branding that you might want to do.
The list is endless. Step number five is literally going through the process and inventory. Everything that you’ve created, even if it is incomplete. And this is the gold, you are going to mine for gold within your own content because it is there. And this is a very first step in the process of really outlining a signature program and offer and scaling your business to the next level is inventory and what you’ve already done and taking a look at it and assessing it.
And then the question is, okay, April, what do I do with all of that? Step number six is grouping together your common assets. So this is literally taking your inventory sheet and you can do it old school. You can pick up one of your kids colored pencils, or you can really organize it out and build an air table spreadsheet and drop each one of the assets under a common,
similar topic, core area or the solution that it provides. Step number six is gathering together your common assets and organizing them into a common area, similar topic, or a solution that it provides. So I literally want you to go through the process of dumping your brain and then rebuilding it into common buckets. And once you complete this process, you’re going to have a clear brain dump in front of you.
And you’re going to know exactly what you bring to the table with a clear direction on what you can deliver right now. You’re going to be surprised at how much you’ve created. I know so many of you out there have created and created and you felt the need and the desire and the pull to create something or to write something or to make a video on something or just to outline something.
But there really wasn’t a place for it yet. And I believe that that’s all part of a bigger plan and a picture. I believe it’s God or whatever you believe that is, that is kind of saving and planting those seeds to come back for a time like now, where it’s time to scale your business and really created into your signature methodology or program or offer or course or whatever it is you’re building.
Because those little hidden treasures that you’ve created over the years are what makes your program yours unique? Nobody can steal it from you because nobody else has that idea in those thought processes that they’re putting into their program, it’s uniquely yours. So once you create this process, you’re going to have a clear brain dump in front of you. You’re going to have organized columns or sheets of what you can deliver right now,
your signature offer. And this is a very first process that I teach entrepreneurs and experts and that most people miss, and by taking an inventory of what you already have, we guide you through the process of then getting more clarity on the transformation outline that your signature offer will have. So we talk about transformation, our outlines in my masterclass. This means your outline and how you take your clients from point a to point Z,
whatever your definition of how many steps in between those things are. The other thing that is so amazing is when you pull from your assets, you are going to be able to get a clear understanding of your niche and who you really want to serve because your assets and your ideas and the things that even haven’t been brought to the table yet, or maybe you’re going to tap into a list of other markets that you know,
that you’ve always wanted to get into. You’re going to assess that list, going through this process and get more clarity and that moving forward. Remember though, don’t start this process until you’ve already completed the prerequisites that we mentioned in last week’s episode, number one 95. So this is hard work. This is not sexy. Quick button push work, you guys.
And that’s why few people do it. And that’s why few people have industry leading signature offers because the work in order to do it and mining for your own gold and developing your own intellectual property is hard work. But I promise you it’s the best, most rewarding, and frankly, most important work that you’ll do in your business, but make sure you’ve checked out episode number one 94 on the two different types of signature offers and that you have connected and gone through the prerequisites of a signature offer that we talked about in episode number one 95.
Okay. Let’s do a little recap here today. We talked about how to do an asset inventory in order to move forward and outline your signature offer course or program step number one was asking yourself what you can deliver right now. Step number two, what are you an expert at? Number three? What do you feel most comfortable offering right now? Number four.
What do you love so much that you would do it for free step number five is getting to work in inventory and all of your assets, finding everything that you’ve created, the list of things that you want to create, things your clients have told you, they want from you. PDF downloads, podcasts, recordings, books, journals, Evernote, files,
everything that you have done. Your current services, take an inventory of those. And step number six is grouping those back together into common areas. And I promise you when you see your assets, if you’ve ever had any question about how awesome you are, you will stop asking yourself that question. Some of the things that I get to look at with businesses when I see their asset,
that I had no idea these entrepreneurs had just sitting in their back pocket and they had never shared it with anybody before. It’s insane. You’re literally sitting on a gold mine. So let’s go ahead and turn it into gold. Don’t forget to add your name to the waitlist for my next signature offer and program creation masterclass by visiting signature offer.com. If you’re ready for that level of business development.
And of course you can grab the free cheat sheet and the little six minute quick start video I have for you also@signatureoffer.com. All right, you guys, I love chatting with you about this. Thank you so much for being a listener here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. And if you haven’t yet, please leave us a review. It really helps other businesses to find this show where it’s our goal to give you proven business strategies and trainings and different solutions you can literally take to the bank of your business at other business coaching firms charge thousands of dollars for we pour it into you here totally free on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast.
Check out all of our show notes and our other business services by visiting Sweetlife<inaudible> dot com. Thanks so much. Bye. Bye

Episode 195: 4 Initial Steps To Creating An Awesome Offer, Program or Course – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Grab the cheatsheets and a 6-minute video to get started building your Signature Offer.

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for experts, entrepreneurs and businesses who:
A) Want to know more about creating your Signature Offer
B) Want to understand the fundamentals of what a Signature Offer or Program really is and isn’t
C) Want to know how to get started in creating your company’s Signature Offer or Program and you’re wondering what to do first. 

Summary:

This show is part of a series called: How To Create Your Signature Offer™, Program, Service or Process. In this episode talking about what you need to do to be ready to create your first signature offer for. Prerequisites are important to hit so you know that what you’re creating is going to deliver the results you want need and expect. So, if you’ve been wondering how to create a signature offer or program this episode is for you. 
 
Businesses are always launching new offers and services. It’s part of staying relevant and giving your customers what they really need. But when it comes to creating a signature offer a signature program or your own new signature methodology, there are a few important things you must do first. 

Highlights:

  1. The four pre-work steps you need to complete before creating your signature offer
  2. Save time and not costly mistakes 
  3. Complete clarity so that you can create your signature offer or program faster.

Resources Mentioned:

Download the CheatSheet: Must-Have Components of Every Leading Signature Offer or Program plus get a quick 6-minute video overview when you Join the Waitlist to create Your Signature Offer™, Program or Process.
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. You guys Welcome back to another episode here at the sweet life entrepreneur and business podcast. Last week on the show, we kicked off our series on how to create your signature offer program or your methodology.
We have talked about the two types of signature offers that you can consider launching or creating in your business. And we’ve talked about what a signature offer actually is and what isn’t a true signature offer. So if you missed that episode, go back and listen to episode 194, because this is a continuation on this series. As we dive more today, we’re talking about four things you need to do before creating your signature offer.
We’re talking about the prerequisites here on today’s show and why this is going to save you so much time and so much money. So again, like I said, this is part of a series we’re doing how to create your signature offer program service or process. So if you’ve been wondering about how to do this in your business and how to really take the lead,
then these episodes are for you and a spoiler alert. There’s another episode in this series coming next week for you. So a lot of gold here in these podcast shows, you know, the issue is, is it experts in entrepreneurs and small businesses everywhere are always striving to be known. And there’s one way to lead your niche and to profit the way you want to.
And that’s by developing a unique signature offer or program, even your methodology, your core principles, it could be a course or a membership community. It could be your content, the you license out to other businesses. We’re talking about a lot of those examples and really get your juices flowing here in these episodes. And the issue is, is that in order to do that,
you have to understand what to do, what creates profitable results for your company, and actually how to go about creating a true signature offer or program that’s going to help you take the lead. How does that sound? So that’s what we’re talking about more on today’s show. So the end of this episode, you are going to know the four pre steps that you need to complete before creating your signature offer.
So the four prerequisites let, just like you’re joining a college course. You have to meet these prerequisites. And by knowing these, by doing these, you’re going to save a ton of money and a ton of time. So we don’t want you to make mistakes. This episode is going to help you avoid a lot of the errors that some businesses that just go off and start creating what they think is their signature program.
And we’re going to avoid the challenges that those companies face and pouring into you today with, with knowledge. And at the end of this episode, you’re going to have complete clarity so that you can create your signature offer or program faster. So if you’ve been a listener to this show for the last almost four years, thank you so much. If you’re new here,
I’m April beach. I help offline companies scale online and entrepreneurs and experts develop industry leading signature offers. And this is a business coaching podcast. We give you trusted, proven business strategies that most business coaches charge thousands of dollars for. So sit back, take notes and start implementing. And I promise you, you will be glad that you did. And the initial,
like many of our episodes comes with some serious bonuses. Today. We are giving you a cheat sheet that includes the components of what every leading signature offer has. And you also are going to receive a short little six minute video to kickstart your signature offer creation process. We love short, fast things because none of us have any extra time. And you can also add your name to the wait list to join my next signature offer masterclass,
which is coming up here soon. And you can get all of that by cruising over to signature offer.com. Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s business training episode.<inaudible> Okay. On today’s show, we’re talking about four things you need to do before creating your signature offer. And here’s the deal a foundational piece. Again, go back and listen to one 94.
If you’ve not listened to that show yet, but a signature offer is in essence, the most important part of your business, it helps you to become known. It helps you to lead in your niche. It helps you to cut through all of the noise of other businesses that are in your same area, or maybe even if you’re a new company, it helps you really stand out in the very beginning of perhaps even a new industry,
a signature offer will also give you predictable results in your business, and it gives your clients predictable results, which is the most important thing. And of course, a signature offer is going to help you control your profit. So that is why having a signature offer. And we use this word offer loosely. It could be a program, a course, a membership.
It could be your signature system or methodology. It’s turning your ideas and your expertise into your intellectual property, and then choosing the business model of distribution that’s right for you. And so today we’re diving into the four prerequisites to building your signature offer. So if you skip even one of these, you can create the wrong thing. Waste years of time spend like truckloads of money that you don’t want to lose.
Just like wave goodbye to that truck, driving away with your money in the back, blowing everywhere in the wind. And you could brand your business incorrectly, which I’m not going to go down that road. You know, we, we don’t, we don’t want to give the wrong message about your business branding because that really takes years of time and money to correct.
So let’s not do that. Don’t forget to grab your signature offer cheat sheets and the quick start video over@signatureoffer.com. Okay. Prerequisite number one is to know who you serve. And we talk about this a lot on the show, you as a business owner, if you are an established business owner, then you know what I’m talking about, because you’ve probably nailed this.
You’ve gotten over that threshold of kind of wondering who this is, who are the people that are desperate for the solution you provide. What we’re talking about here is going even further into that. It’s niching down hard. And for those of you guys that are new entrepreneurs and listening to this show, I get that this is so hard to choose in the beginning,
but once you nail this down and you get more and more specific about who you serve, your business is going to be more successful faster. And one of the ways that you can do this is pulling from your expertise and the experience you have here is a great example of this. This week. I got a call from a woman who is launching a new life coaching business and life.
Coaching is a powerful thing. I’ve worked with a lot of life coaches in the past life. Coaching is also a very popular thing that a lot of people are doing. And so she really needed to differentiate herself from the other businesses that were also in her market and in that place that she wanted to go with her company. And so we had a really nice long conversation.
And at the beginning of this conversation, she went from wanting to be a life coach and helping women and men just get clarity and be high achievers. And at the end of our conversation, she was able to nail it down enough to know that she wants to help men and women get clarity and business advancement. Particularly for those people in the construction industry,
see the difference. It was super specific because her area of expertise and her background is working within that industry. And so you have to go from this high level of generally wanting to provide a solution you’re in your business to asking yourself who specifically am I so providing this solution for and pull from your own expertise and your own experience that you have had in the past.
So prerequisite number one is really knowing who you serve. Now, if you’re a new business and you’re not sure then launch offers launch services, but it’s not going to be your signature offer or program on this show. We’re talking about launching your signature, offer your signature methodology and your signature program. And in order to do that, you have to know specifically who you serve.
That’s prerequisite. Number one, prerequisite. Number two is you need to be able to answer this question. What problem do you solve? Not what do you do or what do you offer? But what problem do you solve? Here’s an example of this. I help busy experts and entrepreneurs who are struggling to take the lead scale, their business, and become the undisputed leader by launching their signature offer.
That’s my statement. And here is a prompt for you. If somebody asks you, what problem do you solve? Here are some words that can get you to craft your own problem. Solution statement. I help blank. So just while I’m talking through this, fill in the blank with me, I help blank. This is who you serve. So I help and then fill in who you serve,
who are struggling with, and then fill in their problem to do, and then fill in the solution or the end results you provide. So I help. And then you can just put like a blank line there. If you’re visual like me, and you’re driving your car blank, who are struggling with blank to do blank. If you can fill in those blanks,
you can answer that question. What problem do you solve? And here’s just a side note. And it’s a question that I get asked actually really often, because I work with a lot of lifestyle businesses as well. If you don’t actually solve a problem, you can also fulfill a deep desire. So if you have retreats or masterminds or things that are more of a fulfillment solution,
that is awesome as well. So it doesn’t always have to be this deep rooted fear or problem. You can fulfill an amazingly deep passion or desire for your clients as well. So prerequisite numbers too, is being able to answer this question. What problem do you solve? Or what desire do you fulfill? Okay, prerequisite, number three, decide what you want to become known for.
You’re not going to get stuck there. I promise you’re not going to get stuck there, but in order to develop a signature offer, you need to choose what you want to become known for because spoiler alert, signature offer is going to make you known, especially when you build it. Right? So really think about that. But let me just share with you a little timeline so that you can see from my own personal experience,
I promise you you’re not going to get stuck there. I first became known for creating the parent coaching industry back in 2006. And my first signature program was called baby university. It taught individuals how to become parent coaches. As a matter of fact, that program is still alive today in my other company, right? You probably had no idea that that’s how I got started now almost 15 years ago.
And then after that, my next signature program was called baby savvy, which was a corporate program for hospitals who wanted to include parent coaching. And then after that I created the baby dream gear class, which was an international class. It was licensed by parenting experts around the world. And then after that, I created the lifestyle business roadmap and launched my second company in 2014,
you guys had no idea, right? See, not stuck. Okay. So when you do it, right, each program you create is a springboard for the next and the springboard for the next. I promise you, you won’t get stuck, but you have to pick one that you’re going to start with and you have to do nail it. So you can own that space.
I own that space and every single signature program I’ve created, you will too, especially when you do it. Right. Okay. So prerequisite number three is to decide what you want to become known for. And then prerequisite number four is to understand right now what you’re qualified to do. So take from your current assets, pull from your current experience, use your unique story.
What have you been through? What have you done, who are the main people you’ve worked with so far and use your unique story to identify, you know, really who am I awesome at getting Results for? Who do I love working with? Who are my favorite people that I love taking care of right now? What have you overcome for these people?
Even personally, within your own business, as it applies to creating a signature offer in your company and the bottom line is what can you create right now? Yes, you can create a signature offer where you also need to learn other skills and bring in other skills to make your offer complete. But we have to understand that for it to be a real signature offer,
it’s pulling from your intellectual property, your expertise, your experience. And so prerequisite number four, to creating your signature offer or program is understanding what you are qualified to do right this second. And I promise you if you’re stumped on this one, no worries. Next week’s episode, I’m going to be diving in with you to show you how to inventory your assets and your ideas and your expertise,
and organize them into a beautiful outline for your signature program or offer. So don’t miss episode number 196, cause that’s what we’re talking about next week, but I promise you when you nail these four prerequisites, then it’s going to save you years of incorrect branding and tons of money and help you to be known in your space faster. So let’s do a recap on today’s show.
We talked about the four different prerequisites, the four things you need to do before you start creating your signature offer or program. Number one was know who you serve. Number two was be able to answer the question, what problem do I solve? Or what desire do I fulfill? Number three is to decide what you want to become known for right now.
And number four is to understand what you’re qualified to do and what you can teach right now to get all the secret weapons that go along with all of these episodes that we have for you when it comes to creating your signature offer program, make sure that you cruise over to signature offer.com right now, where you can also join the wait list for my next masterclass coming up called your signature offer and receive the cheat sheets.
And the quick start video I have. So you can get started creating your signature offer today. All right, you guys, I love chatting with you. Thanks so much for tuning into another episode here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. And I can’t wait to keep talking about this subject. This conversation’s one of my favorite things to talk about, and I can’t wait to see the signature offers that you guys create.
So if you already have a signature offer that you’ve created connect with me over on Instagram at April beach life, just shoot me a DM and let me know what you’re working on or what you’ve already created. I would love to talk about your signature offer here on the show. All right, you guys have an awesome week and I can’t wait to tell Bye bye for now.

Episode 194: What (Really) Is a Signature Offer or Program? And Why Does Your Company Need One? – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the Waitlist to Create Your Signature Offer™, Program or Process with April Beach – Masterclass reopening soon! 

Who This Episode is Great For:

This show is for experts, entrepreneurs and businesses who:
A) Want to know more about creating your Signature Offer
B) Want to understand the fundamentals of what a Signature Offer or Program really is and isn’t
C) Want to know the two types of Signature Offers and determine which type may be best for them

Summary:

This show is part of a series called: How To Create Your Signature Offer™, Program, Service or Process. What really is a signature offer or program? Spoiler alert, it’s not just a common service you slap the Signature Logo on. No… your signature offer, program, course or process is something that sets your company apart. So, if you’ve been wondering how to create a signature offer or program this episode is for you. 
 
Experts, entrepreneurs and small businesses are always striving to be known, but there’s one true way to lead a niche and profit, and that is by developing a unique signature offer, program, process, service, course, membership, system, event, or deliverable which makes it clear for others to understand what you do, creates profitable results for your company, helps you become known and gives your clients incredible results. In this episode we dive into part 1 in discussing “What (Really) Is a Signature Offer or Program and Why Does  Your Company Need One?”

Highlights:

  1. Know what truly is and what is not a true, authentic signature offer or program
  2. Understand the 2 types of signature offers or programs
  3. Be able to identify which type of signature offer or program your company should create first

Resources Mentioned:

Download the CheatSheet: Must-Have Components of Every Leading Signature Offer or Program plus get a quick 6-minute video overview when you Join the Waitlist to create Your Signature Offer™, Program or Process. 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the suede life entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi, you guys. Welcome to another episode of the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. I’m super glad you’re here because we are diving more, a little bit more step-by-step each week into one of my favorite topics to talk about.
So two weeks ago, we started talking about creating your services and making sure that what you’re selling in, what you have available to your audience is in fact selling right now, we talked about your primary offer and your primary programs and doing any sort of pivoting based on the crazy 2020 and how it has been. And we also talked about making sure that your services are solving an immediate problem for people.
Well, on this week’s show, we’re diving in more and discussing what really is a signature offer or program. And why does your company need one? And this is kicking up a brand new series that we’re doing here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast called how to create your signature offer program, service or process. And I’m super excited to geek out on this with you.
This topic is actually my Ninja skill and my zone of genius. And so over the next few weeks, I’m going to be sharing with you case studies from signature offers and programs. My clients have built over the years to inspire you, to see what’s possible in the huge result that you can make in your business by creating a signature process program or system.
And so this particular episode, we’re starting out and we’re answering the question, what really is a signature offer or program, and why does your company need one? And this show is for those of you, whether you are established businesses or you are brand new to this space, this show is for you. So that means that your business is anywhere from phase two to phase five of my start to scale business system.
If you aren’t sure what phase of my start to scale business system that you are in, you can just pause this episode real quick and go take a very short, quick question quiz@sweetlifeco.com forward slash forward slash quiz. And what that’s going to do is it’s going to tell you what phase of business you’re in on my start to scale up business system. And it’s going to give you a list of things that you should working on and focusing on right now in your business.
If you’ve been listening to this show for a while, you know that I try to attack the episodes based on the business phase, so that if you’re in phase two, you know, that this particular show in this training is for you. Or if you’re in phase four, you might want to opt out and not listen to certain shows. But today is particular show is for almost everybody across the board,
in any phase of my start to scale up business systems. So that means whether you’re new, whether you’re just launching or you’re ready to scale for you guys that are offline companies going online. This is a perfect episode for you to listen to this episode is for experts, entrepreneurs, and businesses who a want to know more about creating a signature offer B.
You want to understand the fundamentals of what a signature offer or program really is and what it’s not. And see, you want to know the two types of signature offers and determine which type might be best for your company. If you want to know the answers to those questions, stay with me here in this show. And as a super, very special bonus tool to this episode,
I’m inviting you to check out my signature offer masterclass. This is a class I first launched way back in 2015, 16, 17, and I am bringing it back. I’m so excited about it. It’s a step by step training to extract your expertise, expand your reach and explode your sales. And you can find all the details about your signature opera masterclass by visiting signature offer.com.
And when you add your name to the list for interest in joining the, your signature program masterclass, I am going to give you tools that you can use right now. So you don’t even have to wait. You can get started right away, and I’m going to give you number one, the components, it’s a list of components that every winning and leading signature offer should have.
And I’m going to give you a really short six minute video helping you kick off your creation of your own signature offer right now immediately. So again, that’s the awesome bonus that comes with this episode, and you can find that by going to signature offer.com, okay, this is episode number 194. Let’s go ahead and dive into the show.<inaudible> Okay.
Diving in here, we’re going to answer three really important and foundational questions for you regarding a signature offer and a signature program and helping you to determine really what is the right path in your business. And first of all, what really is a signature offer or program? So that’s question number one, what really is a signature offer or program? The long is a true signature offer is a program service method or a process that you extract from your own IP,
your own intellectual property, your expertise and your experience. So what, you know, what you’re good at, what your ju your zone of genius is what your zone of excellence is in that gives your clients predictable transformational results. So let me simplify that for you, a true signature offer or program is a process in which you create again, from your own IP that gives your clients predictable transformational results.
And it makes you known in your space. That is the official definition that I’ve given to a signature offer. And it, hopefully that will help you to understand exactly what it is and what it isn’t. But let’s go ahead and dive into it even more, a signature program, or offer, extract your expertise. It’s derived from your intellectual property. So it’s pulled from your experience in winning and in failing in a certain area in order to be a winner,
and to be an expert in something, we have to usually fail at it quite a few times until we figure out the ways to overcome it. Your signature offer is the result of that. It’s a ways you’ve overcome something. It’s a ways you’ve gotten yourself or other people really awesome results in a certain area. So your signature offer is pulled from your experience.
It’s nothing like anyone else’s. So your signature offer isn’t like anybody else’s because it contains your unique skillset, your systems, and your processes as true signature offer also disrupts your niche. So it improves or simplifies or changes the way things have been done to give better results, a signature offer, or a true signature offer and program provides predictable transformational results that people can count on.
And a signature offer a program meets your profit goals that your company has set. And it is something that you want to be known for. That’s what a real true signature offer program is. So let’s kind of talk about the flip side of that. What it isn’t a signature offer or program is not a copycat of popular programs that everybody else is doing.
It is not what just happens to be selling. And what’s trending right now in this space. And it’s not something you choose just because it happens to be your main offer. In fact, a signature offer is not something that gives people the same results in the same way that other programs and companies are doing it. So your signature offer program should be uncommon,
but it can solve a common problem, but the way you go about doing it, the way you go about understanding how to get people results is your intellectual property, your IP, your methodology. So again, a true signature offer extract your expertise into your methodology by creating your own unique content that becomes your program. It is not something that just happens to be selling it.
Isn’t something that is the first offer, just because it’s your first offer. Doesn’t mean it’s your signature offer just because it’s your only offer. Doesn’t mean it’s your signature offer. It shows signature offer leads the way in certain aspects and the goals that you set forth in your business. So now you might be asking yourself, Oh, okay, well, what,
what does that mean? And how do I know what type of signature offer to bill once you understand what type of signature offer you’re building, then you’re going to understand the goals that your business is going to set for that signature offer. So now let’s go ahead and I want to share with you the two types of signature offers or programs, they are a foundational signature offer or program or an influencing signature offer or program.
So the two types are foundational or influencing. This is a system that I created. It’s part of my service creation system that I watched about 10 years ago in once you understand which one you fall into, either influencing or foundational, then this is going to help you get more clarity. So I want to impact this with you here and break out the two types of programs,
a foundational signature offer. This is ideal for new businesses entering the market or established businesses going from offline to online, a foundational signature offer introduces you to the marketplace. It gets you on the map, and it helps you as a business owner to simplify your services and your systems, a foundational signature offer can be your first online offer. If you are going through the scaling up or the scaling online process,
or again, going from offline to online to grow your business, or it can be the first program or service that you’re introducing as your company is emerging, maybe into a new marketplace, whether it’s online or offline, a foundational signature offer can have huge profit results. Okay? So just because your business might be new, if that’s the arena you fall into,
or just because you might be new to online, it doesn’t mean that your foundational offer can make you a lot of money. It doesn’t mean it has to be some rinky dink offer. We just call it foundational because it’s setting the expectations for a new marketplace for you. It’s setting the foundation for how you’re first going to become known in a certain space.
So can have huge profit results, but they’re usually they usually are simpler programs. You know, they usually are not sometimes as robust or as long or as intricate as an industry influencing signature offer or a program. And this is because a foundational offer helps you as a business owner to gain confidence in what you’re doing and to test out your new marketplace, a foundational offers a great way for you to say,
Hey, listen, this is my area of expertise, and this is my experience. I want to go ahead and introduce this to a space and test it. So that’s also what a foundational offer does. And foundational offers are designed as that entry point and an introduction for both the company and the new client base to clearly understand the results you provide. So again,
this is new to online. This is a new company that could be starting from scratch, or it’s a program or a different way that you’re testing as far as delivering results to an established market base. That is a foundational signature offer in influencing signature offer makes you known as the leader in your space influence in signature offers are ideal to be created by experts.
So for those of you with extensive experience in getting people results based on your methodology. So an influencing signature offer is for those of you who have tested your content or your program numerous times in the past, even if it was one-on-one or an indifferent settings, you have tested your content. You’ve come up with your methodology and your system after feedback and time and testing,
and you’ve gotten your clients amazing results, and it’s time to expand your reach and your methodology to impact your industry and more people for good. That is an influencing signature offer. And so I want to share those two kind of basic paths. There are two, I call them tracks either foundational or influencing with you. And this is part of my signature creation system that I started teaching entrepreneurs about 14 years ago.
And once you identify, Hey, you know what, right now you could have an established business and you want to just launch your first online program or your first online course. It doesn’t have to be a 1216 week course. You know, you could just start out with a foundational offer foundational program online. It’s going to dive into the water of this new marketplace and test out what you’ve been doing with your clients,
maybe offline to see how well we can scale it to online. That’s a great example of a company who is ready to launch a foundational signature offer. This influencing signature offers. For those of you guys who are experts, your speakers, your writers, you are coaches or consultants of some kind, and you’ve gotten amazing results for clients in the past. And you’re ready.
You know, that the way you go about doing things is a bit, or maybe drastically different than the way other people get results. You have tested your content. You’ve created your content you’ve created, or you’re ready to create a system that disrupts your niche and extracts your expertise, your zone of genius, your intellectual property. And you’re ready to create content and build and create a signature offer or program that takes people from point a to point B.
And you know, that you want to be known as a leader for doing that. If that is you, you are ready to create your influencing signature offer. So those are the two different types of signature offers. And I just wanted to help businesses get clarity on that. And this is why we’re embarking on this new series, because this is a primary way.
My company helps businesses succeed is in creating your offers and your programs. And these are all the common questions that I get. And so I wanted to make sure I was pouring into you guys, our podcast listeners, and making sure that you have these answers as well. So what happens next? Next, we need to be able to identify what type of signature offer or program your company should create first.
And so the first question is how do you identify, what type of art for program should I create? Is it influencing or is it foundational? So first in order to answer that question, let’s identify whether or not you have a current offer that could become your signature offer. We never want to totally recreate the wheel. We always want to pull from your current assets,
from your current expertise, from all the work you’ve already done. We want to take a look at what you’ve already done, as well as what you want to become known for. Let’s just pause for a second and answer that question to yourself. What do I currently have or do, or content I’ve created that I am amazing at that I want to become known for.
And I really want to kind of explode this area. So that’s a first question to really identify and ask for yourself. Again, we don’t always want to start from scratch. The best thing we can do as business owners is using the things we’ve already created and turning them into something even better. So ask yourself is my current service or offer that I have something that I want to become known for in my space.
Does my current offer include my unique intellectual property or methodology, or am I copying someone else’s system? You cannot create a true, accurate, legitimate, genuine, proper, authentic signature offer. If you have just copycatted somebody else’s way about getting people results, a true signature takes your intellectual property and your unique methodology in turns it into your signature system or a process.
Okay. And then the third question to ask yourself is when people think of my business, is this what they automatically think that I do? Do they automatically think, Oh, I’m thinking about, you know, Jody, she’s great at whatever highlighting people’s hair that could be her signature offer. So, you know, do people automatically already think of, of what you do as your signature offer,
or do we also, in the process of creating your signature offer need to reeducate your marketplace is your signature offer an area that you haven’t tapped into yet that you haven’t established yourself as an expert. Yet, if that’s the case, then we’re going to be creating a foundational signature offer for you. So step number one is to identify whether or not you have a current signature offer.
Do you already have a signature offer? If you already have a signature offer, then we need to have a conversation about marketing it and positioning it as a leading offer that it should be. But in most cases, most companies do not. In fact, signature offers are something that is very rarely talked about. When we talk about building courses, we talk about building membership sites and writing books and speaking on stages and marketing on LinkedIn,
none of that can happen until you extract your content in that you create your signature methodology, your signature system, into your intellectual property, that is yours and only yours. It’s your methodology. Then we talk about what business model you build it into. Are you going to launch a course or a group coaching program or a mastermind? All those answers come later.
The first thing is identifying whether or not you have a current signature offer. So if you’re listening to this podcast and you’re driving the car, just answer, do you have a signature offer right now, or one that you would like to really emphasize and become your signature offer or not step number two, determine what you want to become known for what lights you up,
what makes you happy to do what expertise do you have that is within your established zone of genius. So we want to tap into who you are, your expert skills already to develop your signature offers and your programs. And then number three, choose if you’ll be creating a foundational or an industry influencing signature offer. Those are the three steps. Those are your three action items from this podcast episode.
And next week we are diving into the prerequisites of creating a signature offer. So next week, we’re continuing our series on how to create your signature offer program service, or process and episode number 195. I’m going to extract and share with you the prerequisites to building your signature offer or program. So what do you have to know first? What do you have to do first?
What are the principles that have be in place before you’re ready to actually develop your signature offer or program that’s going to help you lead in your space? You understand the fundamentals of what signature offer or program truly is. These three steps. We talked about identifying whether or not you have an offer, determining what you want to become known for, and choosing if you’re creating a foundational or industry influencing signature offer,
we’ll help you start the process of the work to create your signature offer. So your company can become known. And in addition to this whole series, right? So excited, I am giving you a huge tick start to get your signature offer program process, or system off the ground faster. So the bonus for this episode, don’t miss it. You guys,
I haven’t done a bonus, this awesome, honestly, and a really long time in this cause I know you need it. And I just want to pour into you. And this is my area of expertise. So I have so many tools and resources to give you in this area. I really want to give it to you. So the bonus for this episode is I’m giving you a short six minute video explaining what we talked about on this episode,
more in depth. Plus I’m giving you the blueprint of the components that every signature offer should include. So you’re going to get a list of components that are included in every single true, authentic, accurate, proper, legitimate, genuine signature offer. It’s a list and you’re going to be able to go through. And especially if you have an offer right now,
and you’re wondering cautious, this is my signature offer. You can literally go through this checklist and your signature offer or any signature offer needs to contain these components. And I’m giving you that totally free as a bonus to this week’s episode. So cruise over to signature offer.com to grab all that there. Plus you’ll be able to add your name to the wait list for my,
your signature offer and program masterclass coming back again soon. I’m so excited to teach this again, and I promised you, I would share with you some case studies of clients, who I have helped to develop their signature offer in the past. So I want to share these with you at the end of every single episode for the next couple of weeks, just to help get your wheels spinning and share with you what is possible in your space.
So the first person I’m so honored to highlight is her name is Eloise. She is the creator of the serenade program. And I worked with Eloise to create the first of its kind wellness and management program for surrogates. It was absolutely out of this world. We built this program about seven years ago, and she still leads the industry for surrogacy wellness internationally through her company,
family inceptions, international. It’s amazing. And then the second case study I want to give you is my client Lori out of Switzerland. I’ve worked with Lori for a while and Lori has created baby secrets. Baby secrets is her signature program. It’s a corporate benefits and wellness coaching program that includes classes and local resources for expats who are expecting children. And Lori is out of Zurich.
She’s absolutely beautiful. And I will go ahead and put links to both of these programs in the show notes so that you can get your wheels started to turn. So you can see one program. This is international wellness program, and the other one is smaller. It’s a corporate benefits and coaching program. The sky’s the limit, your signature offer. Your signature program can be anything starts with extracting your area of expertise,
your intellectual property, and giving your clients predictable transformational results that no other business champ. And I’m excited to help you do that. So again, the bonuses for this episode go to signature offer.com. You’ll be able to download the blueprint of the components of a signature offer. Watch that quick six minute video, which has even more than we talked about today.
And you’ll be able to add your name to the wait list to join my, your signature offer and program masterclass, which is coming soon. And of course all the show notes. And the quick recap of this episode can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 94. All right. So great to talk to you guys. I hope you’re having an awesome day and this message and these action steps find you wherever you are,
and they inspire you to create and become known for the area in which you’re called. Have you have an awesome day talk to you soon?

Episode 188: How To Self Publish Your Book To Grow Your Business – with Alexa Bigwarfe and April Beach

Alexa Bigwarfe SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Entrepreneur & Business Community App

Who This Episode is Great For:

Small business owners who want to write a book but need to know the steps, how to approach the process, and the ins and outs of self-publishing. If you’re considering self-publishing a book but you don’t know where to start, you’ll leave this episode with clarity and simple steps to take action. 

Summary:

Learn the difference between self and traditional publishing, what your options are to sell a self-published book, the benefits of self-publishing, well-known influencers who’ve chosen to self publish, as well and the 4 steps to start self-publishing your book! If you have a book in you but you aren’t sure where to start when it comes to self-publishing, this is the podcast episode to binge with guest expert Alexa Bigwarf, founder of Write|Publish|Sell and Women In Publishing Summit. 

Highlights:

  1. Know the 4 steps to self-publishing your book
  2. Understand the differences between self and traditional publishing
  3. Get insider secrets about creating your own self-publishing imprint
  4. Understand the connection between brand consistency in your book and business design

Resources Mentioned:

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hi there, and welcome to the sweet life. When you were in business podcast, this is episode number 188 in everything we’re talking about on today’s show can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 88,
because we’re giving you a ton of resources. Like we usually love to do here on this podcast. If you, and I don’t know each other yet, my name’s April beach. I help entrepreneurs grow and scale their business online and develop their internationally leading suite of signature offers. One of the things that you get here on the show, our business strategies you can take to the bank.
So every one of our experts is vetted and I myself have been coaching entrepreneurs to grow and scale their business for over 24 years, we are so glad that you are here. And today on the show, I’m really passionate about this topic and our guests. I’ve become a really good friend with already in a quick period of time, virtually. And I’m super excited to introduce you to her.
Now, let me give you a little bit of background story. You might not know this, but one of the ways that I grew one of my first companies was by self publishing a book, and it was really powerful. You guys, as a matter of fact, this book sold copies everywhere and still to this day, that company, the secondary business consulting firm that I own it’s called baby planner,
inc leads the industry in business consulting for companies that market to new unexpecting families. And the reason why I still have that reach and notoriety in that space is because they started out by self publishing a book on my expertise in that niche, niche, whatever you want to call it, right? But here is the deal. Here’s the truth. I made a ton of mistakes and some of the mistakes that I made ended up costing me a lot of money and ended up costing me a lot of time.
And if I knew more about what I was doing, instead of just doing it and winging it, then I think that my results could have been a lot better or at least a lot less painful. And so today on the show, Alexa, big Wharf is here and she’s going to walk you through the power of self publishing a book you’re going to be blown away when you hear some of the most well known influencers that we all like love and follow and really admire in that they have chosen to go.
The self publishing route. Alexa is a USA today, bestselling author speaker, and publishing partner. She coaches others and offers publishing solutions to those who want to grow their business and share their story through writing a book. She’s the founder of write, publish, sell Kat biggie, press purple butterfly, press Chrysalis, press, and the women in publishing summit,
which I’m so excited to be able to speak at her summit coming up here in spring of 2021. And so let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. You are going to know the quick start steps to publish your book. The difference between self publishing versus going through a traditional publisher and actually getting a literary agent. So we’re hashing out all of this for you today on the show.
And you’re also going to know how and why you can use a book to increase your known well known expertise in your space. So a lot of great things coming your way. This is a great show for those of you guys who are new in business, and you’re just trying to start your platform. And it’s especially an incredibly good episode for you to listen to.
If you have been in business, you have a platform, but you’re what we call like the best known secret. We need to get your voice and your expertise established even more in your space. So let’s go ahead and dive in all of the show notes again, can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 88. And if you haven’t yet be sure to join our new online community business networking app.
It’s totally private. If you haven’t heard we’ve ditched Facebook groups, we’re super excited about it. You can join us by visiting Sweetlife community.com, where you’re going to get all your podcast insights and bonuses in there. All right, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show.<inaudible> All right. You guys welcome back to another sweet life entrepreneur business and podcast episode.
And I’m here with my new friend, Alexa, big war, and we met on Instagram. I was really happy. You know, I’ll be really honest. I don’t meet a lot of people on Instagram, but I totally just want to hang out with and have coffee all the time. But Alexa was one of them. And since then we’ve had a chance to connect deeper and I’ve learned more about what she does and frankly,
you guys really need to know what she does. So Alexa, just introduce yourself here. Welcome to the sweet life podcast. I’m so glad that you have given us a chance to hear all about your expertise. Well, thank you so much for having me and I feel the same way. I mean, I found you, we started connecting whatever, and then of course I do what I always do.
I obsessively like Googled everything, started listening to your podcast and was like, Oh my gosh, she’s saying all the things I need to hear right now. So that’s fantastic. I’m a writer, an author, an author coach, a publisher and a mom, which is a very important part of my story because I didn’t set down this path. I never thought about running my own business or ever even being an entrepreneur.
And sometimes, literally life gives you lemon and you can choose to make lemonade or you can choose to fall to pieces. And without going into all the background, in a nutshell, we lost an infant daughter. She was one of a set of identical Twins and she passed away at two days old. And that took me to blogging. I mean, as you can imagine,
going through anything like that, like I just started, I had, I’m a passive aggressive person and I didn’t necessarily want to share all my feelings face to face with people, but I had a lot of feelings that I wanted to be sharing. So I started blogging and writing about grief and loss and writing about twin to twin transfusion syndrome, which is what they had writing about life in the NICU,
because her twin was a one pound 10 ounce, one who spent a long time in the NICU. So lots of content for blogging and eventually decided I wanted to write a book for grieving mothers. So that’s how my publishing journey started. I figured it all out on myself. I did the things I needed to do fell in love with the process, started writing about parenting.
And I go authored a book called lose the Cape realities for busy, modern moms and strategies to survive. We should’ve gone with a shorter subtitle, but it was at that point really about the second book where people were like, what are you doing? How are you doing this? I want to write a book, tell me what to do. And so a business again,
I love that story. I’m sorry that it started out with so much pain and heartbreak. And I mean, you’re right though. I mean, those are some of the things that we just are so compelled to do. I think some of the best, most powerful companies are started with a deep rooted emotional story like that. And I agree now, writing is such a healing tool.
It can really be an excellent tool for helping people come through trauma, come through grief, come through just anything they’re going through. So that’s actually another Avenue that we really do is work with people on writing to heal because it was such a massive part of my process. Yeah. So give everybody kind of an overview on your company. So write, publish,
sell, and you have the women in publishing summit. So let’s go ahead and lay the foundation and then we’ll dive into what you’re going to train us on today. Great. So I started write, publish, sell as an opportunity to charge people for all the questions they were asking. Right. I started doing the things that were really hard for people to figure out,
like lay out an ebook conversion and how to find all the things that you need to write a book and all of that stuff. And through the process, I created a publishing imprint and created a publishing house. And then another one, and then another one, that’s a whole different story. But you know, I wanted to be a bigger part of the process than just helping someone lay out their book and help them load it to Amazon.
But actually what I found was that where I really enjoy working is not in the, I mean the publishing side. I’m glad I have that experience, but I liken the whole process of helping people figure out what the book is that they should write and why. And then kind of project managing it is really the best thing to get it through from there to publish.
And we work with authors who are self published, who are traditionally published and who are hybrid published as well, which is kind of a cross between the two. I love this process of helping people find the resources and figure out what to do and how to do it. And that’s how the women and publishing some, it was born because I really much like pod-casters,
I think we love showcasing resources and tools and people and putting them in front of the audience of people who need them. So we took that route to create this big basically like week of encouragement and support and educational resources and really a shout out to the women who are writing books, selling books, editing books, creating covers and layouts for books, the whole gamut,
because we just don’t get enough credit out there. It’s so exciting. That’s so exciting. That’s what, so we can just lay it out there, even though it’s going to be months after this particular show airs, but that’s going to be spring 2021, right. Is so women in publishing summit. Okay, great. We’ll make sure that you guys get information about that that’s coming up.
So this is actually a really good place to start. So let’s kind of start out with some basics here. What is the difference between self publishing and going to traditional route of having a publisher? And I understand that obviously it’s not, everybody can just go get a publisher there’s you have to have a certain audience and a platform. And so that’s really difficult,
but many people are self publishing. So talk to us About the difference. So it’s interesting because in the past, And in this time that I’ve been involved, Like we’ve seen self publishing explode. It started at about 2000. Well, it started a long time before that, but it didn’t really begin to be mainstream until about 2009, 10, 11,
12, with the addition of e-readers and Kindles. I mean, it’s hard to imagine what life was like, but it’s own. They’ve only been in our world for about 10 years and it made such a big difference. There are definite reasons why certain people would want to choose their traditional route other than the self publishing route. But for entrepreneurs, the self publishing route offers a really,
really great way forward because you have full control, you do it on your timeline, you make the decisions. So just to back up quickly, when you seek a traditional publishing arrangement, basically there are people who require that you go through an agent or through solicited manuscripts. And then there are a lot of smaller and midsized publisher that allow you to just go ahead and submit your idea for nonfiction,
which is where I would assume most entrepreneurs be. You have to draft a really detailed proposal. They want to know what other books are out there like it, how yours is different, what you can do with it. And I’ll, and it’s a great process for learning and understanding your book. But it’s a very, very timely process. Even if you’re not working through an agent,
even if you’re going directly to a publisher. And then when the book gets to the, or you don’t have to write the full book before you go traditional publishing, actually you just have to create that summary to send to them. And they decide yes or no. The advantages obviously of publishing is that you don’t have to figure out all the pieces of the puzzle.
You, somebody else is going to do it all for you, depending on the size of the publishing house, you may or may not get an advance. It surprises people to know that there are still people getting paid hundreds of thousands of dollars in advances, but those are usually like the Oprahs of the world and that Renee Brown’s a, you know, a hundreds of thousands to millions for somebody and in our sphere,
if you have a good book that the niche that they’re really wanting to fill and the ability to sell the book is a big, big factor. You may, you make it between a 10 and $50,000 advance. So for some people that’s a huge incentive, but for most entrepreneurs, self publishing professionally in a way that doesn’t look like you’ve just thrown it up on Kindle by yourself,
where you have a great cover design, you have great perfectly formatted interior design. You have a perfect cover. You’re following the industry standards. That’s a fantastic route because you can do it on your own time. You can choose what your cover looks like and work with the professionals to make it just right. You know, you generally have the audience already in place that you know is going to be interested in the book.
So definite pros and cons to both sides, but for a lot of entrepreneurs, I bet most of you are familiar with Pat Flynn. He’s self published his books. Um, there are a lot of entrepreneurs. If you were to start looking through Russell Brunson, the key is they’ve worked with professionals so that nobody can tell that their book is self published.
They created a publishing imprint, so that it doesn’t say published by Pat Flynn. It says published by whatever the name of the company is that he or the imprint that he created. So I assume the next question is How did you know? Yes. What is a publishing imprint? Yes. So this is awesome. So they publishers do it too. If you pay close attention to books,
sometimes you’ll see, I’ll make up a random name. Like I think Tarcher is an imprint of penguin, which is an imprint of random house, which is it’s like smaller delineations for the self publishing world. What the imprint means is that you’re creating a name associated to the books that are published. So when you go to Amazon or you go to books,
a million, or you go to wherever, it says published by Kat biggie press or purple butterfly press or Chrysalis press it. Doesn’t say published by Alexa, big Wharf. And you can create an LLC behind that. If you want to you, or it can be a DBA under your own business, some people will make it their company name. So you could have the Sweetlife publishing house or the Sweetlife press Sweetlife books.
People can copyright and trademark things obviously, but generally you can make it to be whatever you want it to be and associate it with your books. Just it’s another step to make you look just a little bit more professional, have a little logo, you know, all those kinds of things. Formation. I think when you dropped names like Pat Flynn and Russell Bronson,
and the fact that they self publish, I, a lot of people are like, wow, I really want to write a book, but I want to be taken seriously. And so when you drop names like you did, you know, some people didn’t know they self published because of that exact reason. And we do actually have our own, we have Sweetlife press.
So, so I have, I have written two books and self published, two books, and it was Sweetlife press in which we did that. And that’s exactly what we did. And so I do understand that process. One of the things that was really interesting as you were talking, I was remembering colleagues and friends and guests that I’ve had on the show.
And I still remember interviewing Denise Duffield Thomas and she was on the show, got a couple years ago and she had just released, I think it was chill preneur. And I remember one of the things we were talking about on that show was that they came back with her and they’re like, this is the cover of your book. And she’s like, why mrs.
Not what bit, you know? And she didn’t have a say, I mean, that’s the cover that the publisher chose for her book. And I still remember being in that interview and thinking, gosh, you know, I didn’t realize it would be that strict and they chose her cover and that was it. And she’s like, whatever I’m going with it.
I know it’s a great book, you know, but this is a cover. They chosen it. Isn’t what I had chosen. And so that’s a great example. And then also I still remember back. So I had a literary agent back in 2009 that approached me to write a book. I had little babies. I think my youngest was like two and a half years old.
And my oldest was only six. And he was so, so excited. It was such a great opportunity. And this agent was like, great, but the deadlines, I couldn’t meet the deadlines. There’s that too. And it was it. And it was exactly what you were saying. I was like, this could be a great opportunity, but I am in this business owner,
mom, life survival mode right now with these children. And there’s no way in hell. I’m getting you all of this by Friday. I mean, this is completely impossible for me. So I didn’t continue with that contract. I defaulted out of that contract. Um, and so as you’re, as you’re talking, I’m remembering kind of some of these things and saying,
okay, I get it. I get it. And just for our listeners, you know, it’s so interesting to again here, because you know, we’re always worried about our personal brand and what the perception is. And we’re going to dive here in a minute to the benefits of writing your own book, which is establishing you as an expert. So you don’t want to look like a cheapo because you’re publishing your own book,
right? You don’t want like, well, I couldn’t get a publisher, so I’m just going to put this out there and hope that people buy it. That’s not what we’re doing. That’s not what we’re talking about. So I love everything that you said. So my next question for you is when you self publish, where are your options to sell your book?
Okay. So you book anywhere these days. So it’s funny, the stigma behind, you know, the self publishing, like I remember years ago when I first was like, I’m going to self publish my book. Like the impression that a lot of my friends had was the first thing that came out of my girlfriend’s mouth was, Oh my gosh, please tell me it’s not going to be one of those horribly written books as 99 cents on Amazon.
But it’s growing beyond that. Like the industry around in the published books has grown so immensely that that’s really just the stigmatism that we carry, but that the rest of the world is moving beyond right now. So now I forgot what you asked me, but Oh, basically like where can you sell it so you can sell it on Amazon. But if I want my local bookstore to carry my book,
I can just Approach them just like a regular, why would any other retailer to sell my product and be like, here, here you go. You absolutely can. And in fact, that’s how most people, indie self published books are now showing up in Barnes and noble and target and all these places. It comes down to just like anything else, your ability to market yourself,
to know your target audience and how you approach them. So bookstores and libraries want to make money. If you know that your book is a good fit for the traffic, they get to their store. And even better, if you can bring something to the table, like I worked with one nonfiction author who approached the bookstore and she said, you know,
this is my book. I’d love to sell it here. But even better than that, it’s a natural book for a, she teaches a course from her book, right? So she was like, I’d also like to bring in my book club, my organization and these people in my workshop, basically, we’ll meet here once a month. And now it’s like,
wow, you’re bringing clients as well with a great love. That totally makes sense. But you have to have it positioned so that they can buy it. And that’s the thing that you can’t put it on Amazon and then go to a bookstore and say, will you please stop by book in your store? It doesn’t work that way. So those are the fine things that you have to learn about.
And those where the expert inside trading secrets When we work with you, I’d never would have even thought About that. Of course. Okay. So let’s talk about the benefits of writing a book. So what we’re talking about here, this isn’t a free book. This isn’t a freebie that you give away as a lead magnet. This is a book with your intellectual property,
your area of expertise, your methodology, your systems, your ideas, your direction, or, you know, precision about how to accomplish something. And it’s not this freebie that we’re talking about. So let’s dive into really, like you said, one of your areas of specialty and expertise is helping people figure out what the heck to write about how do you really guide people through making that decision in order so that it’s going to align with their business area of expertise,
or do you kind of have people that just start out as writers and the might not have a business yet? All of the above. It’s funny. It’s a wild world right now, as entrepreneurs, as writers as all of us, like the doors are wide open for us to create our own path, basically. So I have worked with authors who have come to me,
who have said, I’ll use my friend, Shelley, as an example, she was child has a food allergy. They also have a large family. And she has written a book about how to eat healthy on a budget. So dinner for a dollar is her thing. She wrote her book first and then she wanted to launch a business. So we had to,
you know, create the right path for that to happen. She came to me with her book already written. I helped her do the publishing and then launching and all of that kind of stuff. But then I’ve had other people who have come to me, you may be familiar with sparkle, hustle, grow Julie Ball, the founder of that subscription box for female entrepreneurs.
Like, I mean, No, I’m kidding. It’s created a wonderful product that people love, but now she’s growing her business beyond that. What can she do beyond subscription boxes? So she started a course, a boot camp for people who wanted to create subscription boxes and then a mastermind. So with her, when we were thinking about the right book for her,
it was how do I get something for that group of people who maybe aren’t ready for the course yet are still in that idea of, should I even create a subscription box and definitely aren’t ready for her mastermind yet so that she doesn’t have people joining her program, who aren’t ready for it, wind up asking a lot of questions because they’re very, very new and don’t know these things.
So her book, when we talk about the entryway to your big business funnel, it’s the perfect funnel because it’s a book about how to start a subscription box, what things you need to know, what her process was, what she went through. She uses a lot of examples from other box owners. And then at the end of it naturally, you’re like,
okay, if you’re ready to rock and roll, here’s your next step? Right? So she’s selling a book and she’s potentially growing her next level audience, hugely Perfect ideal audience. And it certainly can separate you and make you an expert in your space. I love that. That’s a perfect analogy as well, especially with the product funnel in that example.
So for people who are listening right now, they’re like, okay, I want to get started. I’ve been thinking about this for a long time. And I know you guys are listening out there and you’ve been thinking about doing this for a long time, because like 90% of the entrepreneurs and business owners I talk about have said, Oh, I really want to write a book.
I’ve been thinking about writing a book. So what are the steps to actually get started in this process for somebody who’s like, this is it, you know, 2020 is my year that I’m no longer going to drag my feet in this, but where on earth do I start? Okay. So to me, the starting places, always first and foremost,
identifying your goal of why you’re writing the book, what you’re trying to get to. And if you can identify that right away, like is it book sales because if selling books and getting on a best sellers list and getting interviewed on Oprah is your goal, then it’s a totally different path. If it’s to grow your funnel entryway into your business, if it’s to give a low cost.
So maybe you have a high end coaching program that lots of people can’t join, but they still want to know your knowledge then is it a solution for that level? Or is it, are you a newer business owner? And you’re really trying to establish your credibility to be known as the person on the street to come to talk to about these topics, to gain speaking engagements,
to be a step ahead of other people, applying for different opportunities, et cetera. So it can be a combination, but those are the general, like three different areas until you get to superstar status. And then it’s because people are telling you, you need to write a book, but for those of us who are not superstars yet, it’s generally one of those three areas.
So really having a clear understanding of that. Yeah. Let me just recap those so that people are really clear. So understanding obviously your why, so is it PR and you really want to be seen on Oprah, whatever that is. And so really making sure that media attention, I know that, and I do talk to a lot of business owners that are interested in that,
and that is obviously a really difficult path. And there are a lot of things that, that need to happen in order for that to happen, especially from an audience building standpoint, then as you certainly number one, number two, a product funnel. So as a product funneling into your other programs is a natural lead in and number three is just establishing your voice and growing your list as far as initially,
did I recap those correctly? Yes. And there are lots of in-betweens and you know, it’s funny because sometimes people will start thinking that they want to do one of those three things. And in the process they realize they have a personal story that they really want to share, and they can’t move beyond that until they write their personal story. It’s interesting.
Like once they get the idea started of, okay, I’m going to write a book, then they veer off in a different direction. You know, I’ve worked with authors who started have almost completely finished one book, and then they were like, I can’t move forward with that until I’ve addressed this issue. And then they wrote a book about how they overcame breast cancer and how other people can do that too.
And then came back to their business, this book. So, so cool. And not a surprise, not a surprise, you know, entrepreneurs we always want to create in creating is so healing. And I think for a lot of business owners, okay. So first figuring out step number one, figuring out what the purpose of what you’re doing is what’s next.
So for me, the next step is sitting down and figuring out the purpose of the book itself. Like, what is the reader going to get from it? Are you teaching them something? Are you sharing knowledge? You know, what are you doing? Are you doing it? How to book, are you doing a self help book? Are you doing a memoir figuring out that and creating an outline.
And this outline is a, sometimes a scary word for people, but it’s really just a, okay, I know I want to get the reader from a to Z and these are the things that have to happen between them and you jot them down in a list and that will help keep you on track and motivated to keep writing that book. So that’s step two.
Then step three is taking some time to either figure out all the steps in the process of publishing or determining. I just want to hire somebody to do all the steps of the publishing for me. And then you figure out who you want to work with basically, or you start researching how to do it yourself. Right? Name simultaneously. You’re writing your book.
Yeah. Okay. So let’s kind of talk about that for a minute. So for business owners that, you know, have a ton of things on their plate, how do you recommend people get the greatest productivity or focus? I know everybody’s different as far as writing, do you say, Hey, take a whole week and go on a retreat and rent a cabin in the woods and write your book,
or do you say, Hey, spend one day a week or three hours, or how do you usually actually recommend for people that are trying to balance all the things that, that they’re trying to balance and get their book? Really? I think the first thing to do is take an audit of what you’ve already created. And we do this through what I call my Quickstart program,
my QuickBook program, I’m actually working on the name of the system itself, but it’s, um, how to get what you already have available to you and start from there because the reality is most of us who are growing businesses have some level of team with us, right? So if you take that initial outline and you’re like, these are the things that I want to cover a next natural step is to pass it off to your VA and say,
go find everything that I’ve already created on this topic. Podcasts I’ve been on webinars, I’ve run all of that stuff and create that vault of information first. And then you can pick and pull things from that. It’ll also make it, if you work with a collaborative writer or someone who’s helping you get the book written that that’s an easy thing to hand off to somebody else.
But, you know, I think to be very honest, like this is where the overwhelmed just gets to them. Cause they’re like, Oh my gosh. Now I have to actually write a book and panic and breathing, you know, all of that, like, you’d be surprised how many people stop right there. They decide they’re going to write a book.
They know what the book is and then the brakes come on because it’s that next step that’s so overwhelming. But there are lots of ways to make it less overwhelming by starting with what you already have. You know, it’s so interesting as you’re going through this, this is our step by step process. Very similarly that we work with businesses to develop their signature programs and offers the outline,
assessing your assets. It’s the same exact process. And it’s true. You know, once they figure out what assets they already have that are going to accomplish a certain stage of that outline in this book, people just realize when they’re like, Oh my gosh, I have to actually go to work and do this. And you know, we have a lot of guys that listen to this show,
but working from home, which many people are and having the distractions, I think there is something super overwhelming about the ability to have an find uninterrupted time. And if, if like, if you’re like me, I have to get on a roll first. So for me to write, I actually have to be in the mood to write, I mean,
whether it’s music or working out first or lighting the dang candle or whatever it is, I have to be inspired to write. And I’ve ran into those problems before. And it’s actually even this way sometimes with recording this podcast where it’s like, if I’m not in the mood to create it, I’m just not creating it. So maybe if, you know,
if our listeners, if you guys are listening and you’ve been in this spot where you’re like, Oh my gosh, I have all this done. I want to keep writing my book. Maybe you’re like me and you’re super emotionally charged and you have to find the right environment or the right pre-activity to get your brain flowing. Because if somebody is like, okay,
well you have to sit down and write from 11 to one. You know what I’m not doing from 11 One writing and this just the way I personally am. Yeah. I completely agree with that. And that’s, that’s why I liked the idea of just sitting down and saying, well, one, you can always hire an accountability partner or a coach to like force you into one hour,
which is all it takes me is one hour to get somebody book out of them and sit down for one hour, go through all the steps that we just talked about and the preparation for it and have this skeleton, because it’s amazing the psychological difference that it makes. Once you have a list of topics just to start with, and then beyond that, you just start feeling.
It’s like, Oh yeah. I remember when I was interviewed on April beaches show, we talked about this, fill that in, in chapter six for that’s what I want to talk about, or you know, that type of thing, or you pick up your phone and you blocked somebody or however you communicate with your team. And you’re just like, here’s the brainstorm I have.
I know I want to include this information, this information, this information, go write it down on a list, go start, you know, filling in the gaps. It takes that overwhelm of sitting down and thinking, Oh my gosh, I have to spend these three hours just, you know, creating the best thing that ever happened. I’m sure.
You know what it’s like when you hire someone to write copy for you, whether it’s your newsletter or your sales page or anything like that, when you start from something that’s already existing, it’s so much easier to craft it and to recreate it, make it sound like you pull out the pieces you want than it is to start from scratch. Well, and that’s the power of working with somebody like you to do it.
So yes, if I had somebody like you to sit down with the deer, like, okay, April for the next hour, I’m going to pull, extract everything out of your brain. Then I would be there with bells on. And that’s exactly. I mean, that’s, that’s a difference. So those of our listeners that are really serious about doing this,
if you’ve been dragging your feet, It’s probably time to get somebody to guide you through this process. Like Alexa, When does the design come in? Is that usually something that takes really a while? Or do you write all the content first and then drop it into a design? How has that process fit into this? So our process and there’s, there’s lots of freelancers.
There’s lots of companies that help with this part of it. But what we do is we get the final edited version from the author when there’s no more changes. Obviously we do a proofread after that. So there may be small changes, but when the content is written, it’s been edited, it is done. Then we have a team of designers and we pick the right designer for the right project and we send it to them.
They do their designing skills because here’s the thing. I’m just going to be brutally honest here, because I can’t say this out loud to people, to their faces, but it breaks my heart when I go to a conference or an event and somebody’s speaking and I’m like, I have to get their book. And I go to the book table and I pick up their book and it’s not formatted properly.
And it looks a mess. And as a publisher, like I’m very in tune with what the industry standards are. So it annoys me probably more than the average person. I’ll, I’ll admit to that, but I can’t buy their book cause I can’t read it because that will drive me. So we have people who know, book, industry standards who know formatting,
who know how to do these different things. We send it to them. They do a couple of mockup chapters. We get back to the author, we say, does this look like what you were envisioning? Kind of like the same idea of designing a cover or graphics or anything like that. We come to an agreement and then we flow the entire book and then they get this beautiful lead designed and laid out book that then we can upload anywhere.
They want to publish their book. Fantastic. And it looks like the brand that they need to represent. And I think that that’s the concern that a lot of people have about self publishing is just really not knowing how to approach this and not knowing how to do this correctly in a way that is going to position them as a brand leader or as an expert or whatever their goal is for that book.
And I it’s the same thing. I mean, it’s like you, you love somebody and then you reach out and you go to their website and it’s not working or things are clicking, right. Or their logo sucks or, you know, whatever it is, it’s all part of the package. Right. And yet I think that another piece that people think is that it’s going to cost like thousands and thousands of dollars because you do see these programs that are like a $25,000 investment.
And I’m here to tell you that you can find people who will do it very professionally and very well, and you don’t have to mortgage your house to pay for the services. And it still looks really, really branded like you would want it to be. And that’s one of the things that we consider, like, are there fonts that you love? Is there a certain layout or things that you use in your things as business owners?
The branding is a huge part of what the cover and the interior looks like a hundred percent having an all uniform with that style guide across, well, this has been so helpful. I appreciate all of your information because you have given our listeners so many steps and so many different things to consider and there’s actions they can take at this point in time, or at least that they know that they can come back and tap into this episode again,
in the future when they are in fact, ready to go down this road, how can people get started? You have a quick start guide for our listeners. I want to make sure that everybody is getting their hands on also so that they can be in connection with you regarding your women in publishing summit and all of your services. Yeah, sure. So if you head over to write,
publish, sell.com, and if you go forward slash Quickstart, That’ll be kind of the freebie download on a recap on some of the things that we covered today, plus some additional resources on, on where to dig deeper, to find out more on those types of things. And then we also have write, publish, sell.com for jumpstart, which is our one hour workshop to help you outline your book.
So if you’re ready to go at that point in time, it’s a very small investment for that one hour to get that done. Wow. That sounds so awesome. That sounds incredible. I think everybody should join the workshop. I mean, one hour and, and see what you have after that and really getting inspired. I think that’s, that’s super great.
Thank you so much for being on the show. I can’t wait to continue to connect with you offline, personally. I know that our companies are going to be connecting again in a lot of ways in 2021. And so I’m excited about that and where can everybody find you on Instagram or LinkedIn and really what’s the best social platform for people to connect with you?
We’re pretty active on, on Instagram with write, publish, sell, and with the women in publishing summit. And I also have my personal account there. Alexa, big Wharf. I’m Alexa, big work on Instagram and then pretty much write, publish, sell anywhere you want to go. You’ll find us awesome. Thank you so much for your time.
I appreciate you. This has been amazing. Thank you. You’re welcome. Thanks.<inaudible> All right, guys. Thanks so much for listening to this week’s podcast. Again, this is the sweet entrepreneurial podcast and all the show notes and resources we talk about as well as our business development programs and how you can find Alexa and get started with publishing can be found by visiting us online@sweetlifeco.com
and get the insider scoop on everything podcast and all of the amazing business bonuses that we give you by joining us in our business community. You can do so right now, by cruising over to sweet life, community.com and create your business profile to network with other companies actually get traction. You might even find some awesome clients in there and get direct business support from me.
Thanks so much for tuning in. I’ll talk to you next week.

Episode 186: How To Survive A Facebook or Instagram Hack On Your Business – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Follow us at @sweetlifepodcast on Instagram! 
 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Every business who operates on Facebook and Instagram.

Summary:

“It will never happen to me” 
 
Famous last words until you wake up and your Facebook and Instagram business accounts are gone. 
 
As a business owner, you likely spend a lot of time and resources on Facebook or Instagram. You post, go live, comment with others, research hashtags, produce IGTV videos and spend too many hours filtering your photos. But these necessary evils are a great way to attract your ideal audience and increase your exposure. Right up to the moment they’re wiped out – with no communication or consent from Facebook, no opportunity to submit a support ticket, no one to talk to for help. 
 
This is what happened to April Beach and The SweetLife Company, and in this show, you’ll learn all of the things no one tells you to do to save your company, keep your followers and survive being wiped from the Facebook and Instagram planet. 
 
This is not an episode about internet security. This is an episode about business survival. 

Highlights:

  1. Know how to protect and preserve your content
  2. How to control the out of control
  3. How your company can bounce back after the hack

Resources Mentioned:

To regain control of your Facebook page you can start by claiming it was been hacked through this link
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome back to the show. Thanks for tuning in here on the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. And today’s episode, I’m downloading those of you who have been asking and asking about what actually happened to our business,
Facebook and Instagram accounts. Many of you follow me or followed me on social media. And you knew that we literally got wiped off the face of the earth. Like we’ve never existed after, well, over a decade of being on Facebook and years and years being on Instagram. And so in this episode, I’m going to share exactly what happened and how to survive a Facebook or Instagram hack on your business.
Now, first things first, this is not an internet security episode. I’m not an internet security expert. I’m actually going to share the things that you can’t Google, that nobody tells you and share the insider things that we learned. Honestly, the hard lessons, some of them we did well, some of them we failed on so that if this ever happens to you,
that you know how to survive it. And also you are going to walk away with four things that I recommend you do immediately right now, because the statement that it will never happen to me is totally not true. I’m so sorry. Especially as we move towards an election, there’s always an increase in internet hackers. And I don’t know about you, but there’s just been so many instances with other businesses that I have heard about in the last six months with COVID and way too many bad people with way too much time on their hands hacking business accounts.
So I know it isn’t just me and I don’t want it to be you. So this episode is for every business who operates on Facebook and on Instagram, because those famous last words, it will never happen to me are only said up until the point that you wake up, like I did, and your accounts are totally gone. Not only that you’re going to hear what happened to my hardware.
I’m just going to honestly download the whole story for you. It is a nightmare, but it’s an eyes wide open thing. And I think that other businesses should know what can happen. I wish somebody had really laid it out there for me, like I’m going to do for you. So, you know, I understand that as a business owner, you spend a lot of time on these resources on Facebook and Instagram.
You post things, you go live, you hunt for the best imagery and source, the best pictures. You comment with others, you research hashtags, you produce IgE TV videos, and you probably have spent way many hours figuring out what filter is the right one to go with your brand or you’ve paid somebody else to do that. So you’ve invested time and you’ve invested money in growing your Facebook and Instagram presence as you should.
I mean, these are necessary evils, and they’re a great way to attract your ideal audience and increase your exposure and establish your expertise as a business right up until the moment when they’re wiped out. And this usually happens with zero communication from Facebook, no opportunity to submit a support ticket or reclaim your account. And frankly, nobody is going to talk to you.
It Facebook, we all know that that nobody cares about you or me enough to get on the phone. They really could give a shit about your brand and your business. And it doesn’t even matter how much money you have spent like us over the years in Facebook ads, because they have enough money. They’ll be just fine without yours. You mean nothing to them.
And if somebody takes offense to that listening, great, maybe Facebook will call me now, anyway, in this episode, I’m going to share with you exactly what happened to our company, the steps that we had to go through to regain access. And frankly, what happens when you have to start your whole entire brand and your Facebook account from scratch it.
The recording of this episode, I think that I have a whole 56 followers on my brand new Instagram account, because that’s the way the ball bounces, by the way you can cruise over and follow me at, at April beach life. I would love it if you’d follow me, but that’s the way it is right now. So let’s go ahead and dive into this show at the end of the show,
you’re going to know how to protect and preserve your content, how to control what is absolutely out of control through settings in your Facebook business page manager and how your company can bounce back after you are hacked in many of the resources will all be found that I’m sharing on today’s show by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 86. Okay. Let’s dive in.<inaudible> Okay.
So let me give you a rundown, just kind of a timeline leading up to this episode. Last November, we had some Facebook hacking instances where it says somebody’s unauthorized logged into our account, and of course we’ve done everything religiously that Facebook has said, the two factor authentication, the separate authentication app. I even have lists of reclaim codes written down by hand in my desk drawer,
everything you can possibly do, according to what Facebook tells you to do, to keep your account secure. We have done them to the hilt. And even with that, we had a hacking instance that lasted eight weeks between November and December last year, where we were unable to comment on our own posts. So if somebody commented to us, we couldn’t comment back.
And we had 11 different times where we were locked out of making any comments to our followers, or really connecting with our followers over a period of 24 hours. So these 11, 24 hour periods lasted over over a term of two months. That was the worst thing in the world to me. And I felt terrible because people that are used to connecting with us and just chatting back and forth,
they couldn’t hear anything from us and they didn’t know why. And so I thought that was like the end of the world. Well little did I know with the rest of the joy that 2020 has brought us, it has only gotten worse in may of 2020. Our Facebook ads account was hacked. And within a period of a couple of hours, somebody had actually started running ads for,
I believe it was a solar panel company and they look totally legit on our ads manager account. And I don’t even know who is getting the money for this. Cause I was paying Facebook. I was getting charged like $1,700 over a period of a couple of hours for running what looked like solar panel ads. Again, the logic behind that the money was going to Facebook.
So nobody was actually making money. It just sounds like a cruel and unusual punishment thing to do to a business owner with somebody that had way too much time on their hands. And so that happened in may and we had open tickets, unfortunately because of that, our entire ads manager count was shut down. Facebook deemed that even after all of the years of all of the ad spend basically all the money that we had paid them to run ads for years and years,
being a faithful business customer that they didn’t want to deal with having to clean out our account from hackers. And so they totally shut down our Facebook business ads account. And if you’re in digital marketing, you know, that means that we also lost all of our pixel traction. So that means all of our pixels, all of the data, all of the tracking that we had done in all of our website pages for all of the people who’ve responded to our ads,
our ability to rerun and retarget ads to our warm audience, everything was lost and wiped out. And that was in may of 2020. I also thought that was by far the worst thing on earth that could happen. And we created new pixels starting from scratch. Then on June 12th at 3:42 AM an email came to my phone that our account had been breached with an authorized access.
And I woke up that morning to no personal Facebook page and no personal Instagram account and no business Facebook page for my other company. So all of the accounts that were connected to one email address worked totally wiped off the pace of the planet. It wasn’t like there were shut down and had to reset the password. They were gone completely wiped off the face of the earth.
And so I, like I had learned to do unfortunately so many times before reached out to Facebook and because I technically in their eyes had to zero Facebook account, like I had never existed. Couldn’t even open a Facebook support ticket. So being the crafty person that I was trying to be and desperately figure out how to regain control of my business and personal Facebook accounts,
I was emailing back to Facebook through my other email address, to the open support ticket that was still open regarding the shutdown of my ads account. Previously. I had somebody I’m so excited. I had somebody I could email. Well, I very soon learned that this person also did not give a shit about me. And because what I was emailing about had nothing to do with actually the first ticket number with shutting down the ads account that this person was not willing to help me and that I needed to open a new support ticket.
Well, unfortunately, Facebook. So you think it’s bad already. Facebook blocked all of our devices. Okay. So in their desire to protect themself, I’m giving them the benefit of the doubt. They blocked somehow some way my cell phone, my brand new iPhone 11, not a cheap phone and even online, I could not access the accounts. I tried to get the text number to be sent to me.
It was gone. You guys, not even like let’s reclaim and refresh this account totally gone. And just like taking a minute here and sharing this story with you. At this point, I was not thinking about my business. I was thinking about the comments that my dad had made to me on my personal Facebook page and commenting on his grandkids stuff. And my dad died four years ago and loving going back and reading his comments on my Facebook page.
I was thinking about the morning things that I get to wake up to of your memories from eight years ago, when my kids were babies and playing with bubbles in the backyard, or sitting in the couch, watching Mickey mouse with an umbrella over their head, those are the things that I lost. And so just separating this a minute here, we’re going to talk about the business loss,
but the magnitude of the devastation of memories that were totally wiped off the face of the earth and Facebook could care less has been absolutely just a tragedy for me personally, as a daughter, as a mother. And so picked up my big girl, britches got back to work, and I will tell you that was June 11th. We did not that regain access to Instagram because they also shut down the Instagram account.
Not only the Instagram account, I couldn’t even log into our other Instagram accounts from my mobile phone. We did not regain access to that until last night. And the recording of this, that was July 22nd, it’s 7:16 PM. So if you’re following along with this terrible nightmare, what I’m sharing is that somehow some way Facebook blocked my cell phone and I couldn’t even log into my other Instagram accounts.
I tried a VPN. I spent four hours on the phone with Apple. I spent two hours in the Apple store, which was a miracle because with Kobe, they’re only supposed to give me 15 minutes. I have, I spent massive time trying to at least control our other Instagram accounts. For example, this podcast account at Sweetlife podcast, couldn’t even log into this count online.
And somehow some way it was told to me that Facebook had blew the serial number on the motherboard of my iPhone somehow some way. And I had to bite the bullet and buy a new iPhone. So it has clearly been a nightmare and all of our communities we’re on Facebook, everything. So I’m recording this episode for you to give you four different ways that you can not only safeguard your account,
but four different ways that you can bounce back. Like we are after it happens, because no matter what, it will be a total nightmare for you. However, there are some strategic things you need to be doing in your business in order to protect yourself, both on the personal side and on the business side. So I’m going to share these four safeguards for you.
And then I have resources for you in the show notes. So safeguard number one, we have talked about this on the show before you need to make sure that your email list, your list of leads and clients and content does not solely live on Facebook or Instagram or any other social media platform for that matter. So that means you need to grow your email list.
Don’t allow Facebook and Instagram to completely control your ability to communicate with your followers. So you need to be getting the names and email addresses of your followers. At this point in time, you don’t even have to think of anything crafty. You can put a post out there and saying, Hey, I heard Facebook and Instagram accounts are getting hacked all the time.
And I don’t want to lose contact with you guys. If you want to be put on our emergency email list, sign up here. I wish I had done that. I should have done that. Knowing how many times we had been getting hacked, although I never dreamed that that would happen and we’d clearly lose everything. So safeguard number one is to build your email list in a separate email marketing manager that you own so that you never lose connection.
So if you have to start from scratch with your accounts, like we have to do, you can email your list and say, Hey, follow us at our new account. Safeguard. Number two, on your Facebook business page, you should have multiple administrators. I did have multiple administrators on my Facebook ads account. Those people that ran our Facebook ads for us,
but we only had one primary administrator on my Facebook business page. Therefore, if you go to Facebook right now in search April beach, you will see my page and I have no control over it. There’s my face. There’s our logo. Nothing. It’s just going to live there forever. And when you see me not posting again, it isn’t because I suck at creating content.
It’s because we have no control over that. So on your Facebook business page, make sure that you have multiple administrators. So if you have an assistant, you have somebody that works with you. I don’t care if you have a friend, make them an administrator on your Facebook business page and make sure this person doesn’t share the same IP addresses you. So they’re not within your own home.
So if your wifi gets hacked, both of you guys, aren’t totally locked out, safe guard. Number three, this is kind of a crafty one. We have this, and I’m really grateful. This is a great reason to have a custom hashtag for your business. So we have a custom hashtag two of them. Actually, one of them is sweet life podcast.
So anytime somebody is looking for one of our episodes, whether it’s on Instagram or on LinkedIn, they follow our hashtag, which is sweet life podcast. And all of our stuff pops up. So because we have a custom hashtag, even with our new Instagram account, I can keep reposting to that same hashtag in our followers that know like, and trust that we’re going to keep giving content can keep getting content from us and they can see the connections to our new account.
So this is a great reason why you should have a custom hashtag that is only your company’s hashtag, then nobody else can take from you. And it doesn’t matter what account you’re posting from. It’s your hashtag. And you can even go back in paying and reconnect with those followers that are following your hashtag, as they’ve commented on it in the past. Now,
if you lose your account, like we did, all of your posts are actually going to be gone. But as you go back and you post more content with that, hashtag people that follow that hashtag are going to see it and then safe card, number four, this is going to take you a little bit of time. Everything else you can do.
Yeah. This is gonna take you a bit of time. Should have this done. Anyway, you need to have this to grow and scale your company to multiple six to seven figures. This is one of those standard operating procedures that you should have rolling anyway. Okay. This is cute. Seeing your content clearly and cleanly organized somewhere else. So everything you post on your social media platforms should also live in a Google drive or in a Dropbox.
We keep everything in Dropbox. So all of the content that we post for every single podcast episode and all the content, right, that I have posted in the past on my Instagram account, that is no longer alive. We have any different account other than that platform. So rather than recreating all the content from scratch, we get to simply go and copy and paste.
A lot of that content, obviously there’ll need to be some editing and updating to what’s pertinent and to make sure it’s relevant right now, but we have that content did live somewhere else. And so if you don’t have a system yet for organizing and archiving your content, you need to have one. It’s also a great way to realize what you’ve created as a business owner and stop always creating new things.
You can start repurposing some of the content that you might’ve posted two years ago, especially if it is still relevant and pertinent, you don’t always have to start from scratch. As a matter of fact, that is not a good idea to always start from scratch. And so those are your safeguard tips and you know, some of these things we did really well.
Again, we have a separate email list. That’s something that we teach you guys about all the time here on this show. I did not have multiple admins on my business page that I lost that was shut down. And I did not have multiple admins on my April beach business page. I went wrong there. I had multiple admins on my business ads account,
but not on the business account. Safeguard number three is having a custom hashtag and you guys can follow us at our custom hashtag at Sweetlife podcasts. We would love it if you did. Now, we’re literally starting from scratch and you’ll go over and you’ll follow us on our podcast account on Instagram. And it’s like, there’s 200 followers and I would love it.
If you’d follow us over there. The hashtag for that is sweet life podcast. You need to have your own custom hashtag, so you can always reclaim and connect and talk directly to your audience. And then safeguard number four is to keep your content cleanly organized and archived someplace else. So you are not totally relying on social media platforms to how is your content?
Another thing that you can use is you can use a social media scheduler like we do. We really love buffer. I know their strep, sprout, social and different social media schedulers. You can go back and see what’s already been posted and copy and pasted out of there, but that’s again, relying on another social platform in a sense. So the safest place for it is going to be in a Dropbox business account or something like that.
So thank you so much for listening to this episode. I hope you guys found this informative. The purpose of this show is to set you up for success in the event of failure. And I don’t want anybody to have to go what we went through since this happened. We now have a new business community. If you haven’t joined us yet, we have created a new custom business networking app,
and we’ve built that completely on a brand new app platform that is exclusive to us called mighty hosts. We love them. We’re very happy and you can join our new business community. So Facebook community is gone. New business community app is here by visiting Sweetlife community.com. We’d love to have you joined us over there and I’m always delivering face to face. As far as virtually goes,
business development strategies, and you get tons of business training and coaching, and you can network with other companies and grow your own business there too. So join us over@sweetlifecommunity.com and all the show notes. And the resources we talked about here will be found in the show notes by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one 86. This was how to survive Facebook or Instagram hack on your business and start from scratch without totally starting from scratch.
Again. I really hope it doesn’t happen to you, but if it does, I hope this episode has caught you first and you don’t have to live through the nightmare that I did, right? You guys, I hope you have a great week next week. We’re diving into all about how to build your first funnel and dive into using digital marketing to grow.
I’ll talk to you again soon. Bye for now.

Episode 184: 4 Pitches To Land Your Dream Business Affiliates – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the Live Stream with April Beach: 
“How To Create Winning Partnerships” 
July 16, 9am Pacific Time
Or Join our Community to catch the replay

Who This Episode is Great For:

Entrepreneurs who want to create partnerships with other businesses, but aren’t sure how to approach them correctly. Getting eyes on your new business or product can be hard. This episode is for those who need an instant boost of fans and followers with a little help from (business) friends.

Summary:

One of the fastest ways to grow your business is by borrowing someone else’s’ audience. In this episode, April Beach delivers 3 proven strategies you can use to create winning partnerships with other businesses for mutual benefits. The more valuable you are as a partner, the more other companies will want to promote and work with you so how you pitch your company matters!

Highlights:

  1. Have 4 strategies to choose from to pitch businesses for partnership
  2. Know how to pitch, when and what to say
  3. Discover the secrets we’ve used to have companies in over 13 countries promote us for free

Resources Mentioned:

Join the Live Stream with April Beach: “How To Create Winning Partnerships” July 16, 9am Pacific Time Click Here to Register
 
Or Join our Community to catch the replay
 
 
 
 
 


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate. Hey, and welcome back to the show. I’m April beach, love chatting with you. And today is really Kind of a part two episode of what we talked about last week. You are tuned into the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast,
and I know, especially now there are a trillion different podcasts that you could listen to. And I really love that you’re here hanging out with me. Thank you so much for that. I love helping you build your business. That is what the Sweetlife company, my company and my team. That is what we do. We’re dedicated to helping you launch and scale your business through digital marketing and online business strategies.
And this show continually now for 184 episodes gives you the steps to do that, that most business consulting firms charge thousands for. So I’m so glad that you’ve tuned in if this is your first time here. Thank you so much. Here is what you can expect from today’s show today. I’m going to download four different ways to land your dream business affiliates.
But before we dive into this today, I want to make sure that you’ve tuned into last week’s show. So episode number 183, I covered, you know, exactly how to pitch partners, the psychology behind pitching partners, really how to determine whether or not a business or an affiliate is actually good for you to partner with. And I gave you the pitch steps.
So if you didn’t actually tune in last week, just pause this episode and go back to episode number 183. And listen to that because what we’re talking about today is a followup to what we talked about last week. And these are a lot of important strategies to discuss. As a matter of fact, this is some of the work that I do with my private business clients that I helped develop their pitches and their relationships sometimes with really high profile brands that other companies can’t even begin to penetrate.
And so this is really important information, and I want to make sure that you are getting it and absorbing it, and you’re taking the steps so that you can go ahead and put it into action in your business. So again, if you didn’t listen to last, week’s please tune into last week’s. And this is what you can expect from today’s show.
So this particular episode is for those of you guys who want to create partnerships with other businesses, you aren’t exactly sure how to approach them correctly. So we covered a lot of the foundation last week, but today I’m giving you four different specific pitch strategies. So we’re really going to be driving into strategy today. So if you want to get eyes on your new business,
or if it’s time to scale your business, or if you’re launching new service or a new product, or if you want to reach a new audience, then these are great episodes for you to pay attention, to and to take these strategies. And here’s what you can expect from this show. So, first of all, here’s what we know. One of the fastest ways to grow your business is by borrowing someone else’s audience and love that statement.
I love that quote, my friend, Cathy Hawn, who’s an online world-class online marketer. She’s been here on the show. She says that she says the best way to grow your businesses, to borrow someone else’s audience. And she’s totally right. So in this show, I’m going to give you the strategies that you can use to create winning partnerships with other businesses,
for mutual benefits. And here’s what you need to know. The more value you are as a partner, the more other companies are going to want to promote you and work with you. And so how you pitch these companies is super important. You only get one shot at making an impression to show your value. And we want them to think, Oh shit,
like I have to work with this company. This company is going to make me look better. This company is going to make me make more money. Our audience is going to love us more because I’m partnering with whatever your company name is. And so that’s what we’re talking about on today’s show. So the end of this episode, you’re going to have four strategies to choose from,
to pitch businesses that you want to partner with. You’re going to know how to pitch and exactly in what order, and you can figure out what your strength is in this area to move forward and pitch them strategically incorrectly the first time. And of course, I love giving you guys bonuses with these episodes, frankly, only you action takers and those of you that are really serious about growing your business in certain areas are the ones that actually take us up on these bonuses.
They are insane. So the bonuses that go with last week and this week’s episode is that I am teaching a live stream this Thursday, July 16th, totally free. And I’m taking your questions about partnerships. So I’m going to work with you and hear your questions and give you recommendations on strategies on how to reach out to your gold star partners. So companies that you want to partner with and the people that you want to promote your business and business affiliates.
So in order to get on that live stream totally free, you just need to join our new Sweetlife business community app. We have our own private community networking app. Super awesome. We just built it and you can join there for free by going to Sweetlife community.com. And once you join, you just click on events and you can register to join me in this Thursday’s live stream.
So we’d love to have you in there and very happy to help you build your business. So let’s go ahead and dive into today’s show strategies, all of the show notes from this episode and all the links that I mentioned in here can be found by visiting Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one eight, four<inaudible>. Okay. So we’ve already established that you have to listen to last week’s episode.
If you haven’t, you aren’t even cheating. It’s just that what we’re talking about here, isn’t going to work as well, unless you’ve tuned into episode number 183, but the rule of thumb that you need to follow when pitching any company is you have to give first. So anytime you’re reaching out, we actually talk about this a lot on the show,
even outside of this specific context, but anytime you’re reaching out and you want to work with somebody, or you want to be part of what they’re doing, you always reach out by giving and you want to ask questions like, how can I help you? How can I help you serve your audience better? How can we support your goals as a business?
And again, we talked about that a lot in last week’s episode. So here in today’s episode, I’m not going to dive into that, but it’s important that you know, that those are the most important foundations for you to reach out first with. So you’re going to get four different pitch strategies here, and you can pick and choose which one you want.
And I promise you, we have not only used these strategies and both of my own companies. If you guys don’t know, I own two international business consulting firms and I have for 17 years, but this is what our clients use to land their dream business partners and affiliates. So you can definitely take what I’m telling you to the bank. All right.
So pitch option number one is to share great content for that desired partner to post. So here’s what we know. Content is King and great businesses are always looking for great content to deliver. So if you write excellent articles or if you make engaging videos, or if you create other types of content that can make that potential affiliate that you want to work with,
look awesome to their clients, do it totally do it. Content is one of the most powerful ways to create partnerships and connect with an audience. And so here’s some quick steps to do that. Number one, reach out with an Epic, original sample of your content that you want to share. So reach out, make sure it is really good, what you’re sharing with them.
And I want you to provide around three samples of your content. You can provide writing samples, you can provide video samples or audio samples. And when you’re reaching out, share with them, say, Hey, we have this great content. I would love for you to post it. This is original content, and here’s the most important thing here. It has to be original.
So this is something that you’ve never put on your own website. You’ve never shared across social media. You, especially with these gold star partners that you really want to work with, you want to provide them something original that can be found nowhere else, because that gives them a marketing advantage over their competitors. And it’s important for search engine optimization. So pitch number one is to share great content with your particular partners that you want to work with,
reach out to them and say, Hey, here you go. You’re invited to share this it’s original content. And obviously your company is going to get credit for the content. It’s actually a great way for you to be in front of your partner’s audience and they can see your face or hear your voice or read your writing. So that’s pitch option. Number one,
pitch option. Number two is to offer, to host an event for that particular affiliate companies are always looking to be the experts. So we, we all want to be seen as the leader in our space. So in this one, this type of pitch, you’re basically going to stroke their ego. And that gets really far in a lot of ways,
okay, this is business, it’s the truth. All right. So you can invite that potential partner to speak to your audience on a social media live stream in a video interview that you can host later and you can share with your audience, their content. So I know this isn’t going directly in front of their audience instead, you’re inviting them to come into your audience,
but it really does make them see you in the beginning of this relationship is a valuable resource and somebody that they want to work with. So you would invite that potential partner to speak to your audience and tell them that you’re going to be sharing this content with your audience and making sure that you’re tagging them when you’re sharing the content and you’re including them in it.
And here is like a gold star bonus. Nobody does this. You guys have to do this. I promise you it will be the advantage. It’s also one of the most important ways that one of our seals, our logo seals, and one of my first companies became internationally recognized. So here is the secret. Are you ready? Okay. Create a graphic logo.
It’s not your business logo necessarily, but create a version of a logo that your partner can use and share across social media. This logo could be an as seen on or as featured by your business name or proud partner of, and then your business name, whatever it is, create graphics for them to pimp out on their social media. Sorry, I just said pimp out hope that doesn’t offend somebody about on their social media put on their website.
And so they could beep up like as seen on kind of as if you were in our podcast. If you were on my podcast, you’d get a whole entire zipped up file of a ton of promo logos that you can use saying as seen or heard or featured on the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast. Same thing. I want you to do this for your desired business partners.
And the second secret bonus is to create done for them, social media graphics. So take their headshots, put that little logo on there and send back images to them so they can put it out on their Instagram stories and their LinkedIn content and wherever else they’re established on social media. So you’re literally doing all the work for them. You’re inviting them to come teach to your audience and not only is that great for them.
And they’re seeing you as a great potential partner to work with more in the future, but frankly it makes your business look really, really good, especially those of you guys who are new in business in the first couple of years, bringing in experts, bringing in partners, makes your business look like the GoTo. And it’s an important thing to do. So that is pitch.
Number two is to invite the partner to come in, to teach or to speak. And I gave you the gold star marketing strategies. After that pitch, number three is to teach for them. So this is identifying their needs, identifying maybe some of the things they aren’t delivering as far as content to their audience and reach out and offer to speak for them,
reach out and offer to teach. And you do this by sending them speaker one pager or immediate press or pitch pack. We’ve talked about this on numerous shows before. If you haven’t tuned into our shows on how to land any speaking gig that you want, then make sure after you’re done listening to this episode, all you have to do is cruise back to Sweetlife podcast.com
and you can search all of our shows for that particular content and find all the strategies that teach you how to do that as well. So here in pitch, number three, we’re going to establish you as the expert. So you want to reach out with a list of topics that you can teach to their audience. Again, you want to do the research.
You want to identify what you feel like their needs are maybe some weaknesses within their market. And you want to provide the solution to that. You want to fill that hole for them and offer to teach for them at no charge. This could be a live stream on their social media. This could be in an event. This could be just frankly, creating a video and letting them post it on their YouTube channel,
whatever it is, reach out and offer to deliver expert content for them. And then pitch number four is to collaborate, to create something new. This is when you reach out really authentically and just say, Hey, I’d love to discuss the opportunities to create something new together. It can be a new product. It can be a new service or an event.
It could be a live stream collaboration or an online summit. It could be even a local event. The sky’s the limit when it comes to collaborations. So let me give you a good example of a case study of this in real time. My other company, I own baby planner inc, is the international leader in business consulting and development strategy for companies that market to new and expecting moms.
And there is a company that we partner with that also offers business coaching for that niche. They train sleep coaches, and they really want to provide the business strategy of developing a company, but that isn’t their expertise. So we are working together to create a collaboration where we bring in our business development trainings for that niche market and their expert sleep certifications. And it’s a complete business package if you will,
for these types of professionals, again, super niche, super specific. And so when you’re thinking about what this could look like for you think along those lines, like what can you create with other businesses that reach the same audience, but they may be missing something that’s different for every single industry. I just wanted to give you a case study and an example of some of the ways that we do this and that we are currently doing this right now so that your wheels can be turning.
So again, we’re developing the business development coaching, and they’re developing the skill set coaching. If you have some sort of a collaboration like that, that you can do within your niche, do it find it that is pitch number four, a collaboration to create something new that has never existed, or that it’s never been as awesome as you and your new ability a business affiliate can make it together.
All right. So here’s a recap of four very specific ways that you can pitch to land your dream business affiliates. Number one is sharing great content for that affiliate to post. Number two is hosting an event and inviting that affiliate to come and teach for your audience with all of the seals and logos and marketing. Number three is teaching for them to their audience.
And number four is collaborating to create something new. Now, let me speak to those of you guys that are brand new in business so that we’re just talking about the elephant in the room. I know that you might not have a huge list yet. That’s okay. You want to find the partners that may also be new and create partnerships with newer companies or companies that are looking to expand,
or maybe at the same stage of business development as you are. If you are a brand new business and you’re reaching out and you want to partner with Proctor and gamble, that might be a little stretch at first. Is it doable? Yes. We’d done it with clients before. Yes. Using these same four strategies. So go big, go for it.
But I also want to say, if you’re not really sure about what sort of collaborations you want for your company, maybe starting out with a business it’s in the same development phase or a little bit ahead of where your company is, is a great place to start. Okay. So that’s today’s episode. I hope you found this incredibly informative and taking action on it right now.
So to take action, choose which collaboration method you think is going to work best for your company to start and identify three top business affiliates that you want to reach out to right now to develop this relationship again, choose your pitch and choose three different affiliates that you can reach out to. And you can develop this collaboration. And the goal is to borrow their audience to grow yours.
It’s absolutely synergistic. It’s perfect for both businesses in giving and building mutually beneficial business partnerships and brand collaborations is really the way businesses are going to grow in the future. And this is a way to get started in that. Thank you so much for tuning into this show. I love chatting with you guys. If you haven’t yet, I would really appreciate it.
If you cruise over to Apple podcasts and left us a review, we read them all the time and along those lines, I just wanted to give a special thanks to a podcast reviewer, Terry Schmidt. Thank you so much. She said it’s practical, relevant, no nonsense podcast. April is extremely generous with the amount of detailed time-tested business advice that she gives on each podcast.
She’s very clear on who can benefit from each training and delivers the content in a way that makes it easy to take action right away. If you’re an entrepreneur working to launch scale and grow your business online and appreciate down to earth and relevant advice, I highly recommend this podcast. Thank you so much, Terry, for that review. And we really do appreciate all the reviews and sharing this podcast with your friends.
You can just click up arrow as you’re listening to this show and share it on your Instagram stories. And especially if you’re listening to it on Spotify, we are on every single podcast platform, even Pandora now, which apparently you really don’t listen to Pandora unless you’re over 40 like me, but I love Pandora. So it was really, it was really exciting for me when we got on Pandora a few years ago.
So I appreciate your time. I hope you guys have an awesome week. It’s always great to pour into your business. It’s such a privilege to do so, and we’ll catch you next week. Again. Join me for the live stream this Thursday, July 16th. If you want personalized business strategy and help to create your partner pitch to get in there, you just go to Sweetlife community.com.
Join our online community app and you will find the invitation to join us. Live this Thursday. All right, you guys have an awesome week. Talk to you soon.

Episode 183: 4 Steps To Land Any Business Affiliate Partnership You Want – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Entrepreneur & Business Community App (free for life when you join in July 2020) Live Stream July 16 – How to Create Winning Partnerships – Join our new online community app for free to attend. 

Who This Episode is Great For:

New businesses – Stage 2 – Launch – Looking for affiliate and companies to network and partner with.
 
Establishes Companies – Stages 3, 4, 5 – Who need fresh eyes and buzz on a new product or offer to who are looking to expand into a new market.

Summary:

When was the last time you pitched a partner and landed it? Fact is… most companies don’t have the time to pay attention to your attempts to work with them, offer your support, or to simply connect professionally. But you need healthy partnerships to grow your business, brand, and sales and you only want to work with the best. So what should you do? 
 
To land the best business affiliates you need to say the right things, approach them on the right way and present your business as an asset they can’t live without.  In this show, I’m breaking down 3 tips to plan, pitch, and land any partner you want. These are the same proven strategies I’ve been teaching since 2008 which landed me partnerships with brands like WholeFoods Market, TheBump.com, Patagonia, Britax, Women’s Entertainment Network, and more. 

Highlights:

  1. Who will make the best partners for your business
  2. How to make a plan to work with them
  3. Exactly what to say to close the affiliate deal

Resources Mentioned:

Join the SweetLife Entrepreneur & Business Community App (free for life when you join in July 2020) Live Stream July 16 – How to Create Winning Partnerships – Join our new online community app for free to attend.  SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast on Pinterest April Beach on Facebook

April Beach on Instagram


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

<inaudible> You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life. You love FASTA with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probate. Hi everybody. And welcome back to the show this week, we’re diving into how to create amazing partnerships for your business and amazing affiliate relationships. And the reason why I was so excited to do this episode is because I get questions all the time from businesses in my community.
How do I pitch people? How do I work with this gold star partner? Or how do I get this company to promote my material or my content, or how do I partner with this business leader? And there are very specific ways in which you should be reaching out to certain partners to get what you want. So in this show specifically, this is for those of you guys who are new in business.
So this means you’re in stage two of my lifestyle business system. That’s where you’re still just launching your business, but you’re looking for affiliate partners and companies to network with that are really going to help you get your company off the ground. Or this is also for those of you guys who are in stages three, four or five of my lifestyle business growth system.
This means you probably have a new product that you want fresh eyes on, or you want new buzz around new services that you’re launching, or maybe even you just want to start pivoting into a new market. And so you are looking for brands and partners to reach out to that you can work with. There are mutually beneficial partnerships. So in today’s episode,
we are diving into all of those things. And you’re going to know all the tricks in how I was able to land amazing partnerships in my first company I ever launched. As a matter of fact, the strategies that I’m teaching to you here today are the same proven strategies that I’ve been teaching since 2008. And they have landed me partnerships with brands like whole foods market,
the bump.com, Patagonia, bright techs, women’s entertainment network and more. So this show is totally packed with amazing information that you can bank on. And at the end of this episode, you’re going to know who will make the best business partners for your company, just because they might look good when you first reach out to them, doesn’t necessarily mean they’re going to be the best partner for you.
So I’m going to talk you through how to figure out who’s going to be the best partner for your business. You’re also going to know how to make a plan to work with them because it’s important that you’re organized. And you’re going to know exactly what to say to them, to close your affiliate or business partnership deal. So if you’re ready for that,
we’re going to dive in to all of that. Right now, you can find all the show notes, everything that I’m chatting about on today’s Sweetlife entrepreneur in business podcast, by cruising over to sweet life podcast.com forward slash one 83. And if you and I have never spoken before, it’s nice to meet you. My name’s April beach, I’m an online business development expert,
and I am so glad that you were here. Let’s do it.<inaudible>. So when was the last time you actually reached out to a partner in landed it, or have you never done this before? Because you have no idea how to even approach a company that you want your business to work with. So the fact of the matter is, is most companies,
they really don’t have time to pay any attention to you. You know, companies aren’t out there begging for different companies to partner with, especially those that are leading the way in their industry. And so sometimes your attempts to have them pay attention to you, just because you want to offer them support, or you want to simply connect with them. Professionally are falling to the wayside,
frankly, they’re too freaking busy, right? And you get that. I get that time is more valuable than money, but you need these healthy partnerships to grow your business. Some of you guys listening have to have these partnerships because you can’t, in fact, even sell your products or services without them, or you’re going to end up spending hundreds of thousands of dollars in marketing,
which you don’t need to do as long as you can lay into the right partners. So how do you do this? Let’s go ahead and break it down. And I’m actually going to give you the four steps. Now, there are a lot of notes in here, and I know that you’re probably driving your car to work, or you’re at the gym or you’re cooking dinner or whatever it is that you’re doing when you’re listening to this show.
And you probably don’t have a piece of paper and a pen in front of you. This is one of those shows that it would be really beneficial if you could jot down some notes so that you remember, because I’m actually giving you step-by-step, that’s going to save you years of time. So if you’re too busy and if you have yet to join us yet in our new sweet life entrepreneur and small business owner,
online forum, we’re super excited about it. We just launched a brand new custom app for you guys to connect with other businesses and you can join us free right now during the month of July, by visiting sweet life, community.com. And I’m going to actually drop in the show notes from this episode into that community. So if you’re too busy and you’re just like,
your life is like mine, and we’re always running around like crazy, then cruise over and join Sweetlife community.com. As long as you join in July, it’s free for life. And I’m going to drop these show notes in there for you. On top of that, with this episode, before I dive into any more detail, I’m also teaching a free livestream business strategy session on how to create winning partnerships on July 16th in that community.
So join that community. You’ll get to join the live stream. Plus you’ll get all the show notes from this episode, but let me go ahead and break the four steps for you to get started right now. So I can give you immediate result right away. So one is to do your research now, just because you think a partner may be a good partner,
doesn’t mean that they actually, well, here are the things that you want to look for when you are looking for really great affiliates or partnerships. The first question you want to ask yourself as do they reach your ideal audience. So a lot of times you might look at a partner and think that they do, but here is how to know your audience has a lifespan.
They have a journey that they’re going through in your business, just like other businesses usually serve a clientele within a certain part of their journey. Now you want to look for partners that serve your clientele, your customers, before they need your service or your product or your offer. The perfect partner is the one that is reaching your clients right before your clients are going to need what you sell.
There are a lot of great partnerships that you think just because they serve the same market or the same niche audience, that they might be cool people for you to work with. But the fact of the matter is, is, you know, I only want to identify who they serve. You want to identify when they serve your ideal audience. So do your research first,
dive in, find out when they connect with your audience, because you want to be the very next step to what that audience needs and the best partners are the ones that get to your ideal client and promote your services right before your clients. I need to find you. So that’s step number one, step number two is what is this company or what is this partner missing?
So what are the things that their clients want that they don’t currently provide? What do they not provide as far as content? Or what sort of service are they not currently providing? Or what sort of service or content or material, or perhaps products are currently providing, but frankly they’re doing it just cause they have to, it, isn’t something that’s part of their ideal business operations.
They’ve identified that they’re missing it. So they’re doing it, but maybe they aren’t really great at it. Maybe it’s not their, you know, Ninja skill. Maybe it’s not their specific zone of genius. So what is this partner missing? What does it not do for their clients currently that could make this partnership even better by you stepping in and providing it,
or what are they currently providing to the clients that maybe they don’t want to be. Maybe it’s costing them more money to provide this type of a service. And this is a great opportunity for you to either Jennifer these items in step in and save the day. What do you have that could make them look better, be better at what they do perform their services better and actually be an overall perfect provider to their clientele.
So here’s some examples of this. If you’re a dietitian, you could be an amazing partner for a supplement company. If you’re a copywriter, you could be an amazing partner for a marketing firm. If you’re a doula, you could be an amazing partner for a baby carrier company. If you’re a staffing company, you could be an amazing partner for a service based business and the list goes on and on.
So after you’ve done your research, take a look at the partners before you pitch them and identify what are they missing or what are they doing that maybe they don’t want to be doing? Maybe they don’t do as well as you could do. And how can you make them look like the best by bringing your services or your content or your materials to their business platform or their physical local business location.
Step number three is making a plan like we talked about in the beginning. Everybody’s incredibly busy if you show up and you’re all frazzled and you don’t have a plan, they are never, ever, ever going to take two seconds to listen to you because immediately they’ll identify that working with you is going to cost them time and money. So you need to have an organized plan and you need to be easy to work with.
And here’s how you do that. First of all, get your systems in place, whatever it is that you’re delivering or providing have systems in place already, that you are able to bring that to this new company. You don’t want to start out by trying new systems in a new partnership. That’s going to fail and it’s not going to be great for your brand.
And we don’t want you to present yourself and have that sort of business brand partnership, rep representation or reputation. So, first of all, we want to make sure you’re super easy to work with and your systems are in place. And then you want to present a plan for how you’re going to contribute or work with this partner. So how will you contribute your content or your services?
When will you do that? And what will this look like? You need to come to the table with a simple plan. That is not only easy for the person you’re speaking to to understand, but it’s easy for that person to present your plan to the decision maker. In most cases, the first person that you talk to in a business to partner with them,
isn’t the decision maker who gets to actually choose whether or not they’re going to partner with your company. So you have to present a simple, organized plan so that the first connection you have can easily explain the benefits of working with you and how it’s going to make them more money and how it’s going to make them look better to the decision maker. But in that you need to offer to amend your plan and you need to be willing to,
to all their needs. So you can suggest specifics on how you can work together. That’s simple to understand and easy to implement based on what they need. So although you’re coming to the table with a plan, that’s going to make you look like a rock star. Believe me, trust me. You’re coming to the table with the plan. You’re saying,
here’s what we can do. This is what it could look like. And this is how we want to help you. But the very next thing you’re going to say is, however, I want to hear what you need. What does your company need and how can we meet those needs for you? And you need to be a really good listener. And at that point in time,
you might want to go back, modify your plan and re, present your plan to them again, after you’ve listened and have to, after you’ve been able to perfectly hear their words and their struggles and their pains and figure out how your company can solve that. So that’s step number three. You have to have a plan. You have to be super organized and you have to be a good listener and be willing to change your plan based on what they need.
And then the very last step is more like a rule, but it’s incredibly important. Anytime you reach out to any partner, you have to understand that it’s not about you. It has absolutely nothing to do with you and your company. You need to reach out with a servant’s heart. You need to reach out giving first. You need to reach out in a way that you have zero expectations for how it’s going to turn around and promote your company immediately.
Especially if you are a new business. Now, I’m not saying you give everything away for free and you’ll be a martyr to this company, but it really has little to do with you. It is a mutually beneficial brand or affiliate partnership that works for both of you. And you need to start first by reaching out and presenting how you can give, let me give you a really quick scenario of this.
People reach out to me all the time and they want to be on this podcast all the time. I mean, I have so many applications for guests on this show. You guys, I can’t even get through them all. And the reality is is that the people that reach out, they send us emails or they go through the application process. And it’s clearly about promoting their business,
their brand, their services, their offers, and their sales. I mean, shit. I don’t even sell my own coaching programs on here hardly ever. This is a show where we are pouring into entrepreneurs and small business owners. It’s not about a show where you pimp out your services. And so those people that reach out and they want to be guests on this show that pitch us like,
Hey, I want to promote this. And I want to share what a great coach I am or whatever. They immediately go in the trash because it’s clear to us that they aren’t about serving you guys it’s clear to us. So they aren’t about providing proven business strategies and trainings that you guys can take to the bank. And that’s our mission. That’s what we do here on this show.
We’re a serving first company and that comes through in every single one of our podcast episodes. And so the same thing goes to reaching out to any business partner, even though yes, from a business strategy standpoint, we want you to create amazing partnerships. You can increase your profit and sales and you can be the leader in your space. Of course, we’re going to want you to make more money.
That is the point of making partnerships. However, when you lead with a giving first attitude with a servant’s heart, with these type of ways and saying, Hey, how can I help you? How can I make your company look better? How can we fill holes that are bottlenecks within your business? That’s how you’re going to land any partnership that you want that is looking for partners.
So to summarize, here’s what we talked about on today’s show. First of all, I mentioned to you join our live stream on July 16th, where we’re going to be talking about all this, and I’m going to be taking your questions on how to pitch your dream business partners. You can join us. Step. Number one is join our online forum and our community totally free.
You can just visit Sweetlife community.com, join our forum for free and then click on events and you can join me there in the live stream. I would love to talk to you and help you. And I will put all the show notes. So we talked about in the show notes for this episode on our podcast website, which can be found@sweetlifepodcast.com forward slash one 83.
And I’m also going to put detailed show notes of what we talked about in the forums. You have to be in the community to get all the detailed show notes, again, visit Sweetlife community.com. And on today’s show, we talked about these four steps. Number one, do your research, not every partner that looks great on paper is a great partner for you.
Number two, find out what they’re missing. How can you make what they do better, faster, easier. How can you make them more money? When you make them more money, you’re gonna make more money. Step number three, make a plan, be organized, present yourself in an organized fashion, but also be willing to listen and amend your plan to meet their needs.
And step number four is to be selfless. I don’t care how big your company is, whether you’re a solo entrepreneur and you’re just one person, or you have a team of 15 or 20 every single time you lead with helping others. First, your company is going to grow faster. I promise. All right, you guys, well, it’s always so great to talk to you again,
cruise over and join us in our new online community app and forum. I am so glad to be out of Facebook. And so I’d love to have you join us in our new app. It’s super fun to play with, and it’s been great to see so many new podcast fans and faces join us over@sweetlifecommunity.com. And then next week we’re actually going to be continuing this same topic where I’m going to give you three specific pitches,
three specific things that you can do to reach out to pitch and land partners. So we’re going to be talking about this for a couple of weeks. If you aren’t a subscriber to this show, please click, subscribe and share this show with your friends. We totally appreciate your help and support. All right, you guys have an awesome week and I’ll see you soon.

Episode 182: Should Your Company Launch an Online Community or Group? – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Entrepreneur & Business Community App (free for life when you join in July 2020) 

Who This Episode is Great For:

Established businesses who want to know if you should create an online community. 

Summary:

Groups are all the rage. Facebook groups, LinkedIn Groups, Slack Channels and more. And you might be wondering if you should create a “group” for your followers, fans and clients. In this episode, we’re talking about the three most common types of groups, what companies these groups are ideal for as well as steps to get started with launching a community group for your company.

At the end of this episode you will:

  1. Know if your company should launch an online community
  2. Learn the 3 currently popular community types 
  3. Have the 5 steps to get your group started

Resources Mentioned:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop.  Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

You’re listening to the Sweetlife entrepreneur podcast, simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator, a probate, everybody. And welcome back to episode number 182 of the Sweetlife entrepreneur and business podcast. Today, we’re talking about whether or not your company should be launching an online community or an online group of some kind.
And so we’re going to dig into this here just in a minute, but I wanted to say, thanks so much for being here and tuning into this show. All of our episodes here are about helping you build a profitable business so that you can live life on your terms for some of you guys and might just be spending more time with your kids or working remotely or traveling everybody’s dream is different,
but the business strategies that we deliver here on this show give you step by step actions every single week for the last three and a half years to make that happen. And so I love that you’re here. My name’s April beach. If we have not met each other before now, all the show notes from today’s episode in everything that we’re going to talk about can be found by going to a quick link over at our podcast website.
That is Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one eight two. This is episode number 182. And again, we are talking about, should your company launch an online community or group? And this particular show is for those of you guys who are in phases three, four or five of my lifestyle, business roadmap. If you don’t know what I’m talking about, I’m the creator of the lifestyle business roadmap.
There are actually five phases to design, launch, and scale a business to deliver that life that you want. And so you can cruise over to Sweetlife co.com forward slash quiz, and just answer a couple of really quick questions and you’re going to get the whole entire roadmap. It’s actually a map that you’ll receive plus exactly what you should be working on right now in your business and a checklist to get your business to the next growth stage.
Again, you can find that quiz over@sweetlifecode.com forward slash quiz. And this show is geared towards those of you guys who are in stages three, four or five. Okay? So on this show, again, we’re diving into those of you who want to know if you should be creating an online community. And here’s the deal we’re talking about this because communities and groups are all the rage,
Facebook groups, LinkedIn groups, Slack channels, and more, and you might be wondering, you know, should we be creating a group for our people, for our followers? Do our fans need a group? Do our clients need a place to connect? Why on earth would we do that? So in this episode, we’re talking about the three most common types of groups,
what companies these groups are ideal for as well as I’m giving you the steps to launch a group community so that you can get going right away. If after listening, you realize this is a good move for you. The reality is a lot of companies launch groups, just because everybody else is doing it. And that’s stupid, right? That’s a waste of time and money.
If it doesn’t strategically fit into what you were doing as a company. So at the end of this episode, you’re going to know the three most common types of groups. These are free groups that businesses launch what types of business each group is good for. And you’re going to have the five steps to get started launching your group community. Okay. All the show notes can be found@sweetlifecode.com
forward slash one 82. Let’s go<inaudible>. Okay. So digging in here immediately, let’s talk about the common types of free groups that are being launched and really what we’re seeing with digital marketing and online relationship building right now. So the first type of group that you may want to consider launching as a free group for your fans or your followers, this is really good for those of you who have a podcast or you’re another media outlet,
or you yourself are a personal brand or a public figure. So it could be a fan group. It could be a place for people to connect and talk about some of the content that you are releasing. And it’s a free group for people just to connect basically because they really like you. And that’s maybe a good opportunity for you as a company, if you haven’t started a group yet.
So that first group is that fan group or that follower group. And that could potentially be a great fit for you. The second most common type of group is a free group for your clients. So this is actually for paying clients, clients that are paying you, but it would be creating a group for people who are paying you to connect. It’s an added value or an added bonus,
along with your services or your product that you sell to them. So it could be creating a free group for somebody to talk about your nutrition product, or somebody to talk about your vacation resort or whatever it may be. It’s a free group for those people who are already consuming your product or your services. And it gives them a great way to connect with one another share stories and maybe even help each other navigate through some of the resources that your company provides.
And then the third type of free group is a group to generate new leads. Now, this is an ideal group, but only for certain businesses. Okay? So what this group is it, the purpose of it is to create a group, to bring new people in that might not be using your service. They might not be using your product. They might have actually even heard of you before.
So this type of group it’s free for them, but it’s certainly going to cost you money in order to grow this type of a community, you’re going to want to run ads to it. And you’re going to want to put money behind it. Maybe even bring in some sort of affiliate partners and have other people filter new leads into your group. The purpose of this is to then have an opportunity to talk with them,
connect with them one on one in turn them from what we call a cold audience that has no idea who you are, but they may be interested in what you do into a warm audience who is then interested in what you do and they know who you are, and they’re starting to trust you. So that’s the third type of a group. And really the recommendation behind it is you need to have some money to put behind it because we are trying to convert a cold audience into a warm group of people that know like,
and trust you. And that does take money to do it in an expedited fashion. So the three types of groups we talked about are number one, this free group, for those of you guys who are again, a, uh, social media, public figure podcast, or any of media outlets, that’s going to be a fan group that could be a great fit for you.
Second type of group is for those of you guys, you could be a private business or a private, even service company of some sort. And you’re connecting people who are already your clients with each other in order so that they can build relationships and get really excited about what you do and what you sell. And then that third type of group is a cold lead generation group that you need to have money behind it in order to generate new leads into your business.
So hopefully that gives you kind of a clear understanding of that. The different types of groups that are available in the reality is, is that there are tons of paid groups. We’re not talking about this on this podcast. We’re talking about free community groups and really helping you get clarity as an entrepreneur, as a business owner, perhaps you’re even leading a division within your corporation.
And you’re listening here and you’re wondering, wow, you know, should we have a group? Hopefully this gives you a little bit more clarity on that. Now let’s talk about the five different steps to get started. If you’ve decided, Hey, yeah, maybe we should dive into this. Here you go. I’m going to make it really simple for you.
This is super high level, but these are rarely important things to make sure that your time and your assets are used wisely. So step number one is you have to start with why we all love Simon Sinek. We all know that the start with why theory almost all entrepreneurs do, and it is so important. And so I’m not just saying this because everybody else says it.
I want you to dive into these four specifics. Number one, you need to have a clear purpose and objective for your group. Okay? So what is the purpose behind what you’re doing? Why on earth are you actually launching this community or this group? Number two? What can people expect from your group? When somebody joins your group? What’s the experience that you’re going to give them or the content that you are going to give them when they jump in there and they take their precious time,
which in my opinion is more valuable than money, then what’s going to happen. What can they expect from being part of your group or your community? The third thing you need to be able to answer is why should people join your community? What is in it for them? Why is your community different than other communities? Why should they go ahead and click the button to spend some time with you or to connect with your other customers or leads or fans over being somewhere else.
And then the last question, these are four questions underneath bullet point. Number one, which is start with why this last question is, what does success look like for your company? You know, when you’re hosting a group, what do you want out of this? Are you looking for sales conversions? If so, how many people in your free group do you expect to convert into paying clients?
What is that conversion that you expect for spending your time and your resources on creating and managing this community? Or are you looking to actually hit certain sales benchmarks? So from this community, are you expecting to increase your sales by $10,000 every couple of weeks or months because of the people that are in this community, or are you very simply just looking to grow your list of leads?
Having a live interactive leads list is a very powerful asset for a company. Even if you aren’t going to sell to them right now, even if maybe you aren’t even ready to convert them into paying clients, having an interactive leads list with the names and the email addresses and contact information is a huge asset to a business, especially those of you who want to build companies to sell.
So number one is, start with why what’s the purpose behind this community? What can people expect? Why on earth should they be joining your community over other communities? And what does success look like to your company for hosting this group? That is number one, please answer those four questions. And as you go through, you’re going to have even more questions for yourself,
which is a great part of business development. Okay. Step number two is what content are you delivering? What are you sharing with them? What is the value they are getting? Or what doors perhaps are you opening for them within your community or within your online group? What discounts, what sneak peaks or new releases or bonuses, what does that look like?
What do you want to give people in your group so that they know that they’re special and that they know that they’re appreciated for being part of that community? Number three is how frequently are you going to share this content or these assets with your group? How frequently are you going to be in there? Or is somebody going to be in there actually talking with them or delivering live videos or recorded videos?
How frequently are you dropping content into your community? Number four is who’s going to manage your community. If you’re a solo entrepreneur, you’re doing all the things right now, but you have to be able to build systems. You can delegate, you can grow your company. If you are a small business. And, you know, you have anywhere from five to 15 employees,
who’s in charge of building the relationships and nurturing the relationships within your community. Do you need to hire somebody for that? Should you hire a virtual assistant or do you have somebody on your team that you can delegate this to, or do you have to be present yourself as the CEO or as the COO or whatever your title is? Is that a necessary part?
And if so, how often do you want a need to be present within your community? And then the fifth question you’re going to want to answer your for yourself is what platform are you going to use? Again, I could record a podcast on each one of these platforms and we’ll dive in a little bit with some more details here after I summarize what we’ve just talked about on the show,
but really high level, the most common platforms that you can choose from are mighty networks, which all go on a little mighty network tangent here in just a sec. So mighty networks, LinkedIn groups, disciple media, or a Facebook group. Those are the most common group platforms I also could add into their Slack channel. Slack channels are getting really popular.
So let’s go ahead and throw Slack channels in there as well. I know many of you use them just to communicate with colleagues and I mean, there’s so many other platforms, but these are really that the highest level, most common platforms that are currently being used to host online communities and groups. So let’s go ahead and let me do a summary and recap for you.
If based on the types of free groups we talked about in the beginning of this show, you’re like, yes, I want to do this. Here are your five steps. Number one, start with why, why are you creating this community? Number two, what content are you going to deliver? Number three, how frequently are you going to deliver that content?
Number four, who’s going to manage your group. And number five, what platform are you going to create and launch your group in? Okay. I hope you guys found that incredibly helpful. I want to save you time and figuring this stuff out on your own and the purpose of this. And actually all of our podcast episodes is to save you time so that you can intentionally and strategically grow your business and make more money faster.
If you want to dive in more, all of the show notes that I talked about again, can be found in the show notes section of our business, which is found@sweetlifepodcast.com. And the episode that we’re on is number 182. So it’s Sweetlife podcast.com forward slash one eight two. Okay. Now let me give you this little post discussion about platforms, those of you guys who listened to last week show,
no that I’ve hosted Facebook communities for years. I can’t even count how many years. It’s at least six years. I think it’s seven. It’s been a long time. And because of Facebook security issues, our account was hacked. Anyway, we lost all access to our communities. And this has just happened so many times. And as a company, I was just becoming concerned about continuing to have my groups in a platform that has been difficult to say the least.
And I want you to know this. However, it doesn’t mean, I don’t think that you should. I just have this gift of killing Facebook. Somehow you guys just keep are really real with you. Facebook and April beach do not get along. And we’ve had multiple issues over the years. So I’m not saying it’s not a great platform for anybody else.
I’m just saying it didn’t work for us. So we did tons of research. I also hosted LinkedIn groups in the past, and I am so excited to announce that we have created our own custom community app and group in a network called mighty hosts. It’s absolutely amazing. And we have hundreds of businesses just in the last 24 hours who have joined us over there.
It’s super cool. You guys, I’m going to geek out and I’ll be really honest with you, you know, mighty networks and mighty house. They aren’t, I’m not an affiliate of theirs. They aren’t paying me to tell you about this platform. It’s just been really amazing. Is it perfect? No, but it is definitely something I want to share with you as a business owner,
that we’re very happy transitioning to this platform. And I know that so many people in our new community have asked me to talk about this within the last 24 hours of joining. And so this little blurb here is for those of you guys in my business community, because I promised you I would talk about mighty networks. And so if you would like to over and join us in mighty networks,
this is a place where you can network with other business owners. So you get to create your own profile, your own business links, your own social media links, and even write a blurb about your company. It’s a very cool platform to grow your relationships with other businesses and potential leads. Number one, number two, we are releasing high level business masterclasses to our community.
We love this platform and we’re doing it here and it’s all totally free for a limited time. It’s going to be free forever, but you have to join us during this opening time as we transition over to mighty networks. So as long as you join in the month of July, you are going to get into our business community totally free and be able to play around with it and download the app.
And so this is my official invitation to you. If you would like to join the Sweetlife entrepreneur and small business hub in our custom app, you can totally do it, no strings attached and connect with us for free, just cruise over to sweet life, community.com. And you’ll be sent the link to register and to create your business profile and to get in there and just devour all of this crazy good free business information that is worth thousands.
And so I would love to meet with you and connect with you over there. The other cool thing we’re doing about this, and this is my last little tangent is all of the bonuses that come with our podcast episode. We are putting there in the podcast topic of our app. So no more opting in, no more having to fill out a stupid opt in form,
you know, especially when you’re already on our email list in order to download workshops and tools and templates and blueprints and worksheets, I’m just giving them to you so you can download directly to your computer and our community network. Isn’t that cool. Basically, I create what I want for myself. And so that’s what we’ve created for you. So again, you can join us by visiting Sweetlife community.com
right now. Thank you guys so much for listening to the show. I always appreciate your time. I know how valuable it is and all of the show notes. One last time, including a link to join us in our new app can be found@sweetlifepodcast.com slash one 82 Awesome week. Bye for now.

Episode 166: COVID-19 (Coronavirus) Business Opportunities and Tools To Work Remotely – with April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Episode Bonuses:

Need faster business growth? Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.

Who This Episode is Great For:

  • Local businesses affected by COVID-19
  • Small to midsize businesses ready to scale online
  • Entrepreneurs looking to grow their brand and ready to hyper-focus for big results

Summary:

There’s no doubt that COVD-19 will affect how some businesses run. These are hard times, but on this show, we’re talking about great opportunities to grow and scale your business online. These strategies will help you continue to reach and serve your clients while developing new streams of income and developing a new business model that leads to more lifestyle and location freedom for small business owners. 

Highlights:

  1. How to meet with your clients virtually
  2. Software to work as a team online
  3. 5 things you can do right now to grow your brand from home
  4. How brick and mortar stores can sell products creatively

Resources Mentioned:

Calendar Software: 
 
Create an Online Community: 
 
Team Management Software:
 
Other:


SweetLife Podcast™ Love:

Are you subscribed? If not, there’s a chance you could be missing out on some bonuses and extra show tools.  Click here to be sure you’re in the loop. 

Do you love the show? If so, I’d love it if you left me a review on iTunes. This helps others find the show and get business help. I also call out reviews live on the show to share your business with the world. Simply click here and select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review”. Thank you so much ❤︎

Need faster business growth?

Schedule a complimentary business triage call here.


Full Show Transcript:

you’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator A probe Age Hi there and welcome to the show Episode number 166 of The Sweet Life Entrepreneur A podcast and I’m April Beach Super glad to be talking to you. Not super glad to be talking about this topic, but we are finding the silver lining in today’s show. We’re actually going to dive in and talk about some really awesome business opportunities within the circumstance we find ourselves in with Cove in 19 across the world.
Now, if we don’t know each other yet in April. Beach, founder of the Sweet Life Company and Baby Plundering and host here of the Sweet Life Entrepeneur, a podcast have three awesome teenage boys at home. My husband’s an entrepreneur, and it’s always gonna be connected with you. I know we have a lot of new followers and new listeners, so thank you so much for tuning into this show. In a nutshell. I help women scale their business in a strategic way that helps you actually create lifestyle freedom while building a multi six figure company.
And so the strategy is that we talk about here on the show are to give you the steps to do that. This is a business development and business coaching podcast off the show. Notes from today’s episode can be found by visiting Suite Life Podcast Don con Okay, this is what you can expect on today’s show. We’re diving into business opportunities and how to find a silver lining with Kobe had 19. I am going to cover what to do if you are a local business, where you serve people face to face and you actually are used to seeing them physically.
Whether you have a brick and mortar store or you go to your clients, we’re talking about different ways that you can continue to grow your business and serve your clients. During this time, we are also going to cover different ways to connect with your team and continue to communicate, to continue to grow your business, and I’m going to dive into very specific strategies for those of you who are independent entrepreneurs and Sola preneurs Thio focus on things that you can be doing to grow yourself and your company during this time as well as we’re gonna wrap up the show.
And I’m gonna share with you personal things that you could be doing to grow as a professional. And then if you’re interested at the end of the show, I’m gonna be diving images, sharing some personal behind the scenes, just opening the front door of the beach house of our house and sharing with you some of the preparation that we do. Why we do certain preparation for certain emergency instances here in the beach house and also some scripture that I share with my kids to help sustain them and help them to feel strong and confident and at peace during really crazy times that we’re facing right now.
So we’re gonna dive into all the business strategy first. I’d love it. If you are interested, you’ll hang out with me and tell the end, and I’m gonna share with you behind the scenes here at the beach house. This particular show is perfect for you. If you do have an established business that serves clients face to face. If you go to work at a place where you’re working with other people and a co working space. If you are not really sure how to continue to do your job and actually grow your company when you can’t see people face to face and it’s for all of you,
Mom is out there just like me who are thinking big picture more than just about your business, about your life and your strategies and how to continue with the momentum that you’ve already experienced in 2020. If that is you, then stay tuned and very specifically for those of you guys who listen your faithful listeners, you know what phase of my lifestyle entrepreneur road map that you are in This particular show is tagged for every single phase of my life. So entrepreneur road map. Those were the five phases of business designed launch and growth.
If you aren’t sure where you are, you’re welcome to go back to the show notes and take a quiz, and you can find out what exact phase of business growth and development urine and receive very specific tips to grow your business. Beyond that point, we usually tag each episode here on the suite Life podcast. So you know whether or not a particular business. Training applies to where you are in business right now, so you aren’t getting distracted or sidetracked. So this particular episode, of course, does apply to every single phase of business development in my lifestyle.
Entrepreneur Road map For those of you guys that are wondering, Okay, let’s go ahead and dive into today’s episode. First things first. I want to talk to those guys with local businesses. So if you have a business where you serve somebody face to face, maybe you’re a realtor. If you’re a massage therapist, maybe you are a counselor or a trainer, and you are used to actually having people interact with you at locally. It doesn’t necessarily mean you have to have a brick and mortar store, but you’re used to interacting with people locally.
Here are some suggestions and some things that you could do to continue to serve your clients during this time. These are business development strategies that we talk about all the time with established business owners. So here’s a little background of this and why this isn’t a downer. This is a really cool strategic opportunity here. I actually work with businesses, local businesses to help them scale their company by offering virtual service is right. Now, you find yourself if you have done that yet in a place where you’re forced to do that.
But I want to let you know that what you might be forced to dio is a business strategy that we use all the time to help companies grow and actually make more money by offering a combination of local service is and virtual service is So here are some suggestions so that you can actually start tapping in already to the opportunities of online business scaling even if you didn’t want to. Okay, so the very first thing I recommend if you haven’t started this yet,
is start to create a calendar online. And I’m gonna give a lot of different links to online software you can use in our show notes.
So don’t worry about that. You can cruise over to sweet life podcast dot com forward slash 1 66 and I will put the leaks of all of this software that I’m gonna recommend.
But the function I want you to do is to set up an online calendar if you don’t have one Yet for your business.
This gives people in your established clients an opportunity to book with you online. At that point in time,
meet with your clients virtually in a video call. This is how I work with clients all over the world.
And I have for over 12 years this is not something new. And if you haven’t tapped into this yet,
believe me, as soon as you start meeting with people, virtually you’re gonna love it. You might not even want to go back.
So start setting up virtual meetings. If you have a group of people that you’re used to serving, maybe you can’t show up to speak in an event.
Maybe you’re not able to teach a group of people like you had planned or to coach your host something that you had planned locally.
Maybe it’s a weekly class that you’ve done. I recommend that use. Do you think about creating a short term virtual online group again?
I’ll put all these links for you, but couple examples are a pop up Facebook group. You can create a Facebook community for his long or a short as you want.
Facebook does a really great job of helping you to connect with people and be able to serve them in Facebook communities.
In addition to Facebook, there are also other platforms, which I love. 1st 1 is disciple disciples,
an amazing on my platform where you can actually create in a community of your clients and customers and that you can connect with them and continue to serve them virtually an linked in Does a pretty good job with groups linked in is trying thio.
Continue to emphasize groups on Lincoln as well. If you find the majority of your customers are on LinkedIn,
then consider creating a short term linked in Group two. In fact, connect with your customers and provide virtual consulting and virtual service is to them.
Idea. Number three. Go back to old school phone calls. You guys, I think somewhere along the way we lost the power of getting on the phone with somebody.
It might not be a landline with a curly cord connected to the wall, but getting on the phone and connecting with your customers is a really powerful way to continue to serve them,
hear what they’re saying, understand their struggles and continue to coach them or consult them or provide service is to them if you have products that you sell.
So I’m talking to specifically to those of you guys who have a brick and mortar store with products, and you might even have a little bit of an online store.
But your primary business is having people walk through your door and see the face to face you can during this time when people might not be out in about as much as they have before.
How about featuring your products through live streams like a show and tell? How about showing up a couple of times a day from your business Facebook page from your instagram page and holding up one of the products talking about the products,
the features of the products? It’s like the Home Shopping network thing. This is kind of what I’m thinking about.
What an amazing way to talk to your customers about new items that just landed in your store that you know that they need anyway.
Show up on Facebook live, show up on Instagram and do a video about a product you can even give a virtual tour of your store,
and then I have a call to action for people that pick up the phone and call you in. Order that product over the phone.
That’s for those of you guys that don’t have a virtual store yet. We’re going old school. They can pick up the phone.
They can say, I really want that bag. It’s so cute and I can’t go in there and buy it.
But I love the way it looks. Can I please buy it from you? You can ring them up through your online.
Check out that you might have through PayPal or square up or any other online process it or that you have,
and you can drop it in the mail. To them, this is a great way to increase your social media falling to continue to build a relationship with your clients and to continue to sell products if you have a local store.
And, of course, if you have an online store and you haven’t really been able to have focused on that because you might have a local store as well.
Now is amazing opportunity to really emphasize your online store and to do some other natural interaction through social media to increase your sales again great places to do in these live product show and tells our Facebook instagram LinkedIn.
And if you have a high Twitter following, you might be able to get some traction as well on Twitter.
What a creative, fun, disruptive way to continue to be in your customers lives moving on. Four.
Those of you guys that have a team that you run you need to connect with your team. Here are some different platforms that you can use to continue to grow your team that will benefit you in the long run.
Even when you come back together locally, you can use slack. It’s a great way to chat with teams you can use.
Streak Streak is a plug in to Gmail for business that has your pipelines in your sails, and many people can tap into where customers are in the process,
virtually through email by using streak. There are also other platforms, like Facebook, workplace, Vasana and Trail.
Oh, and we’ll make sure that we put all the links to every single one of these platforms for you in the show notes.
So if you’re driving your car right now or you’re busy and you can’t write this down. Just cruise over to sweet life podcast dot com forward slash 1 66 and I’ll make sure that we’re sharing all of these really simple and powerful software platforms that can help you grow your business,
serve your clients virtually and continue to connect with your team. Okay, now let’s switch gears a little bit.
Now I want to talk to those of you guys specifically who are already entrepreneurs. You may already work from home.
You may already have the laptop lifestyle Freedom. Congratulations to you If you do that, I can’t even tell you how grateful I am right now for the fact that I don’t have to leave the house.
It is just a feeling of peace for me. And so if you have that as well, I’m grateful for you.
If you do not have that, please hit me up here. You can send me a direct email to podcast at sweet life co dot com,
and we’re happy to work with you to establish that sort of a business model in your company as well.
For those of you guys who already have this business model, this is a really amazing time to start hyper focusing on what you need to be doing to continue to grow your personal and or your business brand.
So some things that I want to challenge you. So you listeners other. You guys know you Are you private Listening to this podcast for a long time?
You’re a coach or a service based consultant. You are really ready to continue to press in and grow your business.
You might even have had big plans of what you were supposed to be doing in your company over the next couple of months.
They might be getting a bit sidetracked Right now. I want to challenge you to do a couple of things to grow your business.
During this time. Number one I want to talk to those of you guys who specifically know you have a book in you.
Sometimes we need something disruptive like this in life to make us set aside the timeto outline or write that book.
If you’ve had a book inside you and you find this time that is inspiring for you to sit down and write it.
I want to encourage you to do that for those of you guys who’ve just been busy in the busy work of serving clients.
You know what I mean? You’re busy in the busy work. You’re constantly serving clients. You have very little time to actually work on business about men.
I want you to look at your weeks. Look, att. Some of the changes. Maybe you don’t have to be driving around as much taking your kids to all their activities.
Maybe. You know, you aren’t going out to go to Costco to go shopping groceries getting delivered to you.
The silver lining here. You’ve eyes. Is it? This situation with Cove in 19 is actually giving us the gift of time.
Time to be home. Time to think about what’s important time to be with those people We love time to focus on our health and time to focus on our business.
All right, So if you’ve been busy in the busy work with your business, I want to challenge you to sit down and start thinking about outlining new packages.
Higher level service is deeper offers with better results. I want you to sit down. Look at what you’re offering and consider bringing your business to the next level by creating new offers,
New packages. New service is your new programs. Take this time to brainstorm. Look at what people are buying and what they’re still challenged with and consider what you’re selling.
I also want to encourage you that if you haven’t yet, now is a really great time to set up a virtual coffee.
So we talked about this in last week’s podcast episode. Excuse me an episode number 1 64 We talked about this.
So two weeks ago we talked about how to connect with people in a deeper way locally, and one of them was to create a smaller mastermind in set up virtual coffee with business colleagues.
Do that now find five different people. If you don’t know them, reach out to them and Facebook groups or an instagram and ask them if they want to chill and have coffee with you.
Talk shop, help each other out, really create business relationships with people that understand what it’s like to be exclusively in online entrepreneur.
Another opportunity. I want to encourage you in. Have you been avoiding doing live streams because you’re not comfortable?
Now is the time to get comfortable. I want to encourage you to do be doing more lives, dreams to connect with your audience.
Maur to be sharing may be behind the scenes a little bit about what you’re doing in your company. Whatever that looks like to you,
now is a great time. Thio Face any fears you might have had of going on video and going live in really encouraging your connection with your audience virtually and then just a couple other pro tips for you.
Now is an amazing time to be pitching podcasts. Working on your media pack, working on your signature talk If you’ve been putting these things out,
if you’ve been putting out booking yourself on podcasts or booking yourself on stage is, now is the time to dive into that because there’s always you can continue to grow your business virtually,
and you are now given the gift of time. We’re looking again at the positives in this situation here.
I know there are a lot of really sad and terrible things happening right now, but I wanted to create a show where we’re looking at the positives here together.
Okay, now I want to give you some specific suggestions based on industry of different ways where you can utilize the opportunities here.
First of all, if you’re a therapist or a psychologist or a counselor or a life coach uses time to help your clients find peace and grow internally,
obviously you’re a psychologist or therapist. You already know that you’re the expert in that. Not me, but one of the things.
And there are some regulations of what you can do based on your licensing. One of things you could do is hosting a virtual group,
meeting or hosting a session where people can come together. They can share some concerns that they might be having together and really be able to talk about that.
You could do that in zoom meeting rooms, and you can do that and go to meeting and a bunch of other software we’re gonna give you.
The resource is to check out. But the point here is people are turning to you. People are looking to you because they need to find strengthen themselves and so looking at the situation,
and I think it’s okay to not continue business as usual, or at least to look at what else can be done to connect us in a time where we might felt isolated or disconnected,
and many people feel scared again. I know that there are certain regulations to that. For example, I called my child’s both my kids counselor who doesn’t have the ability to meet with them virtually because I didn’t want to bring my kids into the medical offices.
So I do know there are some regulations to that that based on the regulations you have, I just really wanna encourage those of you who can to be creating an opportunity to bring people together in that.
So it’s one business idea for you. If you’re in marketing, how can you help your clients create campaigns that work with Cove in 19?
I’m not saying make a joke of it, but you’re the creators. You guys are marketing geniuses. How can you help your clients actually start talking about the situation,
working with the situation, other than possibly ignoring it, pretending like it isn’t there? Or maybe that’s a terrible strategy.
Maybe they do need to ignore it because it would be detrimental to their particular business if they honed in on that sort of,
ah, of a negative focused again, you’re the experts. But consider helping your clients creating campaigns in response to this,
or creating a business strategy with intentionally not focusing on this. For example, if you have a client that has a cruise ship,
then you’re probably not gonna be talking about Cove in 19. But there are other marketing campaigns that that can be built on.
If you have a physical product, you can increase your sales by making alterations to what you offer how you bundle your packages.
Think about that. So if you sell, you know diffusers and CBD oil and you know in different hair bows for kids.
Can you make packages? And can you market your packages? Can you create new products based on what people want right now with other things that are happening?
And I want you to think creatively outside of the box? What can you do to create, or how can you alter what you already have in order to meet people’s names?
If you’re in real estate, can you offer those virtual home tourist for your clients? So where you’re taking your cell phone,
your face, timing them, Or maybe you’re going through each one of the homes that you have under your less teen and you’re doing video tours of the homes with your commentating,
so it’s very personal. It’s just like you were there taking a client through a home. But instead they don’t have to be there.
You can facetime them. They can say, Hey, can you go back? I want I want to see that room again and you can walk them through there.
So really thinking outside of the box and disrupting business is normal in order to provide a really great amazing service and continue to grow your company.
If you’re a travel blogger, what can you do? The highlight. Different things that people can do at home in the area outside.
You know, these are all specific suggestions for you, and I want you to really be thinking outside of the box in different ways.
You can continue to serve your clients, continue to increase your sales and continue to grow your business during this crazy time.
Okay, and that ends our time together today, where we’re talking about strategies to bring your local business online during this time,
different ways to connect with your team different outside of the box ideas to continue to grow your service is and continue to serve your clients.
And, of course, for those of you were established online entrepreneurs already, we talked about different things that you could do to really focus in and bringing your brand to the next level during this time and for all the show notes from this episode,
please cruise over to sweet Life podcast dot com forward slash 1 66 where you’ll also find business help to learn to grow in scale,
your business online in different opportunities where we can help you do that immediately if needed. And if you’re interested in hearing the personal side of some of the preparations were doing,
the things were focusing on as a family and how we’re helping our kids just hang on tight and I’ll be right back.
Okay, welcome to the beach house. I’m opening the front door and sharing with you some pretty personal stuff regarding this episode.
This issue that we’re all dealing with globally and just sharing with you. For those few were interested in a little bit about how how we deal with us,
how we prepare for things like this, and so In order to give you some background, I need to tell you a story which many of you do not know.
I don’t talk about it very often. But my youngest son, Samuel, was born with very severe food allergies.
And at a very young age, I learned that if there was ever an emergency that the American Red Cross couldn’t feed him,
he really could eat nothing in. So from the time he was a baby, I’ve always had stockpiles of food because I’ve had this deep rooted mama fear that he’s going to starve if they’re Waas something that happened in 2011.
I believe it was. We were here in the 100 year flood in Colorado and I was very glad that we did have food supply because we needed it.
And so we are very prepared as a family. There are reasons why we’re very prepared. I wish that I didn’t have to walk through is a mom and my son didn’t have to walk through all the scary times that he did.
Is is a young kid with severe allergies, but because of those things, there’s always beauty in the ashes,
you know, because of those things were always very prepared. So if you’re curious here in the beach house,
yes, we have lots of supplies, but I want to encourage you to do whatever you feel is comfortable.
You need to do what brings you peace. Obviously, they’re different guidelines or recommendations based on what country you live in in what your government recommends that you have.
But I just want to encourage you, too, do you? And to find peace in whatever brings you peace.
There are a few cool things that you could be doing at home with your kids, like maybe reading a series of books that you’ve never been able to dive into.
I was just thinking of reading Call the Wild with my kids because I know the movie is out, and I haven’t read that since I was a kid.
My boys have never read it, so I know there are a lot of things that I think about.
It’s almost like what you think about if you’re stuck in a blizzard for a long time, all the fun things we could do at home.
We as a family love Qattan. We absolutely, totally geek out on that game. And so we play a lot of Qattan,
and there are multiple different things that you can do at home to really make this time with your kids super special in.
So if you find yourself where you stuck at home, I don’t know if you will be when you listen to the show and I’m hoping that none of us have to be.
But if we find ourselves a bit isolated, there are some really fun things that we could do to find the silver lining and to connect with each other more deeply.
And I just want to encourage you guys to do that. And although this is not a Christian business podcast,
I’m very transparent, and you guys know that I’m a Christian, even though I love using the F word and costing a lot as well that really trips a lot of people up any out.
I’m not shy about that. And so one of the things that we’ve been doing is sharing with her two kids different scripture that they can stand on when they’re feeling afraid in giving them a couple of different tools every single day before they leave the house and I just want to share with you.
This is very personal. I’m not saying that every family needs to do this, but I want to share with you guys what I do every day before I send my kids Doctor school.
Besides the basic, you know, making sure their address didn’t have shoes on and something to eat every single day before they leave,
we pray over them. We plead the blood of Jesus over them. And now I also anoint them with oil and those air things that based on Scripture.
Lord says that as parents we have authority to do for our kids to help protect them in the world,
not just in times like this, and honestly, shame on me for really ramping it up. Doing it now,
in times when, you know, it could be a little sketch to send him out in the world.
I should be doing this every day, but this is what we’re doing now. And they just wanted to close out and read you guys really cool little excerpt from Jesus Colleen on March the 10th.
This is the day that I’m recording this show, so I thought I would just read for you guys real quickly here.
It said what it says. It says your mind for all time and beyond time into eternity. No power can deny your inheritance in heaven.
Even if you falter, is you journey through life. I will never let go of your hand. And that’s just a short little snippet from Jesus calling.
And I have clients with many face. I serve and I connect, and I am very good friends with women who believe a variety of different things.
And so I’m just sharing with you behind the scenes what we do as a family, and I just want to encourage you to tap into your piece to your source.
During this time, we’re really strategic on a business building side, but we and you’ve heard me talk about this.
If you’ve listened to this show for three years, I don’t believe in work. Life balance. I believe in building companies that harmoniously connect with each other,
and now is just a CZ important to talk about that. So that’s today’s show. Thank you so much for hanging out with me.
I adore you. I hope you found the strategy is helpful I hope those view establish entrepreneurs. Her listening you felt challenged to bring your brand to the next level during this time,
focus on some things, maybe even putting on the back burner. And there are a lot of software.
Resource is for you here in this show. You don’t have to remember them all. I will make sure that we have links to every single software resource for you to check out whether your new toe online business or you have been doing online business serving your clients online for a long time.
I’ll make sure all the resources are in the show notes. You could find those show notes by visiting suite Life podcast dot com board slash one 66.
Thanks so much, You guys, I’ll talk to you next week.
That’s all folks!

Episode 165: How To Grow Your Business With Pinterest – With April Beach and Melanie Fountain

Melanie Fountain SweetLife Entrepreneur April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Who This Episode is Great For:

  1. Those in any phase of my Lifestyle Entrepreneur System
  2. Those who have used Pinterest for their business yet and are interested in getting started

Show Highlights:

  • Pinterest expert, Melanie Fountain, will help you understand the basics of what you should be doing every single day and week on Pinterest
  • Why Pinterest is so powerful; especially when compared to social media platforms
  • How you can get started with your very own Pinterest marketing plan today

Take Action with Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Facebook Community 

Resources Mentioned:

Melanie Fountain’s Website

Melanie Fountain on Pinterest

Melanie Fountain’s Facebook Group | Pinterest for Bloggers and Content Creators

Schedule Your FREE Strategy Call with Melanie Fountain

Canva

Tailwind

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast on Pinterest

April Beach on Facebook

April Beach on Instagram 

Full Show Transcript:

 

you’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probe Age Hi, everyone, Thanks so much for tuning in with me again for another week. Here on the suite Life podcast It’s good to talk to you and connect again, and today we’re diving Maur into online marketing strategies. Last week on the show, I talked to those of you guys who have been doing a lot of work. Maybe you’re spending a lot of time on instagram or on Facebook or even on LinkedIn,
and your numbers just aren’t growing. And we dove into some really authentic marketing strategies that have worked for years and are important to keep integrating into your business to grow your following. Today we’re diving back into some of the online marketing strategies because, as a business owner in today’s day and age were all online marketers. And so it is important that we’re always continuing too deep in our online marketing skills, and so I am thrilled to be joined by a Pinterest business building expert on today’s show. Now I’ll be honest with you.
I’m not a Pinterest person. I don’t cook, so I usually tell Go after recipes. I do love looking at Pinterest for design and in home needs, but it’s not something I do on a regular basis, maybe like five times a year, So I don’t even think that actually counts at all. But we do is a business, have a Pinterest account and it always shocks me. When I go over to our Pinterest account and I see how many followers we have or how many people are noticing the content,
I often think to myself, Wow, this is a really engaged platform. I should be here more, but the truth is, we haven’t as a company. It wasn’t something that we had had on our marketing strategy and plan. And so I have the privilege of interviewing today’s guest. After this interview, I asked our guest who was amazing to sit down with myself and Kelly, who is my content quarterback for the content for the show, and we started diving into our pincher strategy, and I will tell you,
with only one week of doing the strategy that you’re gonna learn here on this show, are Pinterest percentage has risen by something crazy like 1900% engagement. It was insane. The numbers from one week of doing What Today’s guest taught us how to d’oh from today’s show. So I’m so excited to introduce you and share of these strategies with you. So today’s podcast is for those of you guys who are in any phase of my lifestyle entrepreneur business building system. But if you have not used Pinterest before and you want to try that strategy so it doesn’t matter where you are in your business building if you haven’t built your business yet or if you’re an established scaled multi six figure company and you want to use Pinterest,
this show is for you as well. This show also is going to help you understand the basics of what you should be doing every single day, every single week on Pinterest. How Pinterest works, why Pinterest is powerful, especially when you compare it to other social media handles in the S e o aspects of Pinterest and how you can get started on your very own Pinterest marketing plan today. You’re gonna leave with all of those answers after this show If you’re busy and you can’t take notes of what we’re talking about,
you can find all the show notes over its sweet life. Podcast dot com forward slash 1 65 All right. You guys were here with Melanie Fountain, and she is a Pinterest guru. We’ve been wanting to bring interest experts on the show because you guys are asking for it. We as a company, we want to know more about growing and connection with our listener to followers rip interest. So I’m super stoked about this show. We’re talking about everything interests who should be on Pinterest, how to activate your business and Pinterest.
You know how to grow your list through Pinterest how to get started software scheduling all of the I would save basics. But I’ve been through, you know, we’ve been through this outline of what we’re gonna talk about before, and it is foundational information, but really, really powerful. So I’m very excited to have Melanie on the show. Please introduce yourself and let everybody know who you are. Hi, everybody. I’m so excited to be on here today. Thank you, April for having me. My name is Melanie Fountain.
I am a blogger and Pinterest strategist. So I work with bloggers, content creators and business owners that want to get their contents scene without paying ah ton of money on ads or having to worry so much about website S E 02 ranking Google and that heavy competition. And we strategize based on their content. And really, it’s kind of let the little guy be seen. And it’s possible to market yourself without paying a lot of money and add. I love it. Okay. And how long have you been doing this?
And what’s your history? How did you get end to doing this? I love hearing everybody’s stories, and I know a lot of our listeners resonate with our guest stories. So tell us just really quickly some background of how you started doing this. Sure. Well, you know what? This month is my year anniversary of really calling myself an entrepreneur. And I started as a virtual assistant, so as a general virtual assistant, just wanting to get out of the regular 9 to 5. I’m a single mom and I live in California,
and I really wanted to, you know, you feel like you’re missing out on life when you’re working your life away for a company. But you know, you’re really not going to grow in. So I decided to sign up for a virtual assistant course, and then it kind of went like wildfire from there, and I fell in love with Pin Trust and the visual side event. But then the you know, the strategy behind it, the marketing and I started working with business owners and found that I actually had a talent in it.
And so I actually started as a Pinterest strategist about nine months ago now. But since then I’ve been able to work with over a dozen business owners, helping them grow Pinterest and strategize. And in May of 2019 I was able to quit my job. And so I’ve been working for myself for the last nine months. Net war Basically, since I transitioned over to nation down into Pinterest marketing and here we are that’s such on the awesome story.
Oh, my gosh, that’s a chance. My story and that story alone like, forget we’re gonna talk about pictures today.
That story alone, a lot of our listeners are like I can’t wait to be there and that’s what I’m working towards.
And so it’s really cool, especially in such a short period of time hearing those awesome results, and I will just kind of add in there.
The reason why Melanie probably had such amazing results is because she needs down like she is that pinchers expert.
If she was like I’m the V eight, all people in all things, I can guarantee you her business wouldn’t be where it is today.
So we talk about Nietzschean a lot on this podcast. She is a perfect example. That’s so I’m super excited that you’re on the show today,
So we’re gonna talk about Pinterest everything. First of all, give us some background about Pinterest. What,
actually is it cause it’s not a social media platform? Right, Right? Exactly. So Pinterest is commonly known as a social media platform,
but what it actually is is a search engine. It’s a visual Google, and more than that, it’s a discovery engine.
When people go on Pinterest, they want to be inspired. They want to discover they want to learn,
but they don’t always know what it is exactly. They’re searching for soap. Interest is there for people to discover what it is they’re searching for.
And a lot of the time from a business perspective. They’re there to discover you were there to discover your business and the value that you have to provide.
And Pinterest has over 300 million active people monthly on Pinterest, searching for businesses like the businesses that listen to this podcast.
That’s crazy. That’s somebody over multi 1,000,000,000 searches every month. And and that’s why I’m a little bit we’re gonna talk about s CEO and how to be found on pin trust,
of course, but it’s such a powerful platform. And on Lee now, are people really starting to discover the power of interest?
That’s so cool. Okay, so one of our listeners, you know, she’ll be out there saying,
Okay, that’s cool. But I’m on all these other social media platforms and you know, I’m strapped for time,
So just reiterating what you just said. It is a surgeon, Jen. It is searchable by Google,
and it’s actually on Lee search engine that we know of today that actually is searchable by Google. Is that correct?
YouTube is as well, but that’s right. Yeah, So there’s YouTube Interesting Google and those are the big guys when they have to search engine.
And that’s the funny thing. And I’m glad that you mentioned that April because when you’re searching something in Google,
a lot of the articles and images that come up are also on Pinterest. So when you’re on Pinterest,
you’re kind of killing two birds with one stone, right? Yeah, you’re definitely increasing CEO getting to page one and all that stuff.
You were gonna talk about that? Okay, so who should be on Pinterest? If you are creating consistent content,
you should be on Pinterest and it’s really a simple is that you don’t have to have a blawg. You know it’s helpful.
Absolutely. But if you’re a podcaster, if you create videos if you write article, you know, if you’re creating content,
Pinterest is where you should be. Okay, awesome and some things like Okay, cool. How do I get started?
I talked to people about the different stream like a business account and a regular account is Pinterest have both different types of accounts.
So when you when you sign on to Pinterest is a user, when you create an account most of the time you’re creating a personal account.
The difference between creating a personal account in the business account. When you have a business account, you will lock features like analytics.
You can track the performance of pans you contract clicks to your website. You can leak Pinterest to your website to enable rich pins,
which basically pulls the metadata and on the S E o from your website, making your pants more likely to be seen super cool.
Okay, so is it still one account? So you sign up. Is that personal? And then you upgrade to business or they to separate accounts to usually recommend people have.
It depends, so you could do both. As a personal account. You could convert and make some of your more personal boards secret or if you’re a blogger,
and if your lifestyle blogger and a lot of your boards are already relevant to your ideal audience, then you can keep those boards.
But sometimes I could recommend if you have ah, 100 boards random, completely unrelated to your business, it might be better to create a whole new account altogether.
Okay, Super interesting. All right. And then how does somebody get started setting up their account. It’s freeze.
So if you want to get started on Pinterest, you sign up for your business account. Oh, you know,
if you have a website you put in your domain, you make sure that you clean your social media accounts and then when you’re really got me started on,
Pinterest is all about content and, you know, scheduling to different board. So I have a 10 10 rules.
So you want to start with 10 templates, I recommend Camba. It’s free to start, and they have a really good monthly program with all these stock photos,
and they have a lot of Pinterest template to. So if you’re not a graphic designer and that’s not your,
that’s not your thing. Campbell has a lot of free templates. Create 10 of them and then you can just kind of plug and play.
I recommend about Reed of four pins for a piece of content, and if you have a lot of content,
but you’re just getting started on Pinterest, just pick may be the last five pieces of content blowing post podcast and then create four or five pens for each of those,
and then you could eventually work backwards if you want to do that and then use those 10 templates and then schedule them to 10 relevant board.
So when you’re creating boards, I recommend having, like, a best of board of your business. So on Lee,
your content goes in that board. And then if you’re a blogger having your content with all of your blonde post and one or a podcaster,
whatever your content, maybe and then beyond that have really generally named boards. So that way, when you’re scheduling content,
we’ll get to schedule that you just a little bit. But when you’re scheduling to those boards, you can pretty much set your Pinterest on autopilot.
So you know, if you can’t afford to have somebody managing. But you kind of, you know,
with Pinterest, I’ll get more into this, but you want to schedule at least 8 to 10 times per day.
Oh, my gosh. Okay, let me ask you some questions. One of the things that you said Waas and I want to make sure our listeners you’re hearing this.
So for every piece of content, you want to create three separate kin’s three separate posts from that content.
This is great content repurpose ing strategy, a love that you said that. So for every piece of content you guys create,
whether it is an article that you’ve written on your website or if it doesn’t matter where you want to send them,
you could somebody actually an article he wrote on somebody else’s website to establish you as an expert or if you’re a guest on somebody’s podcasts and them two that podcast,
whatever it is. But for every piece of content you recommend three different posts, and then you recommend 10 different templates to choose those three different posts from so 10 templates that you creating Can va there,
there and all you have to do is plug and play a different title plug and play different image in there.
We heard that. Christ, Lee. Yes. Okay, all right. And then Pinterest for those of our listeners that haven’t been on there yet,
has boards. And you can place your own content, your boards, you can pin somebody else’s content to your board.
And so what you’re saying is, and I love this this is really great. So a lot of our listeners are in the phase of actually scaling their business where they’ve been in business for a long time.
And they do have a lot of content, whether they’re podcasters or bloggers or just straight content creators and other capacities.
So in love, the best of board, so the best of board totally cool. And you’re also recommending those people that are bloggers have a board to put their block post to have or their articles?
Would you recommend any other kind of creative boards like we? D’oh! We like to do a lot of promotion of our clients and of our podcast listeners.
So would you recommend, For example, we had a sweet life entrepreneur, a podcast like featured listener board where we could send linked to our favorite and greatest listeners.
You know, would that be something that you’d recommend as well, even though it doesn’t actually promote our company?
But it would make other people realize what we’re about? Are those type of things beneficial as well on Pinterest?
Absolutely. You could do, you know, and I love my client’s board and share your client’s content.
You can you know your podcast episodes. If you’re somebody that creates AA lot of freebies and you have a resource library.
You can have a board just on sweet life. Entrepreneur freebies. Wait. Have 100 and 57 of them.
Okay, well, you know what? There’s 400 pins, you know? Go. Yeah, and I love how you said repurposing content because that’s exactly what it is.
It doesn’t have to be hard. It’s a long I’m talking and all of you are probably thinking, Oh,
my gosh, this is overwhelming. But it’s really just taking the content you already have and putting it out there for the world to see.
I love it. Okay, so now let’s go back to my short little heart attack when you said eight times today posting.
So let’s talk about posting frequency. What is that like, How often are people on Pinterest? So,
for example, when we look at it another social platform, even though we’re trying to say that Pinterest isn’t one of them,
but another platform where you can put content like Lincoln, for example, the average person only goes toe linked in twice a month.
Okay, so every single different outlet has a different frequency. Talk to me about Penn dresses, Pinterest frequency.
Why? Eight times a day. It’s all about S E O. It’s about also staying relevant because you have,
ah 100 million you active users every month. Ah, good portion of that. Our business owners putting up their content constantly,
and it’s also about staying on top of the feeds you want to be. You know, it is search engine optimization,
so the more frequently you post they could be anywhere from eight times a day to 50 times a day.
And that’s why it’s really important to have a good scheduling tool. The reason why you do that also is to continue to be able to share your content.
Work frequently because you can share one pin once a day. But if you’re on Lee sharing that pin,
then you can only really share that every selected because your feet is just going to be like, Hey,
look at me, look at me. So that’s why you want so many different pens. And once you get in a rhythm of scheduling them out,
it’s not so overwhelming. So you know, at first, you know, getting everything set up is time consuming.
But once you get everything set up and automated in a loop in in a schedule that eight times a day will quickly increase to kind of get your get your content more likely to be seen.
Okay, a ball questions number one. Can you on Pinterest re share the same pin over and over again?
Or would that just be repenting the same pin to a board? Or is it actually fresh brand new pieces of content that should be released eight times a day?
You can repent the same pin every day, but two different boards. That’s why you want to start with 10 boards and continue to grow off of that.
So at it, it’s more important tohave more boards than it is to have a lot of pins and a few boards.
So that’s why I think it’s very important to have general board. So when you have one pin, let’s say you’re a travel blogger or something,
and you have aboard all about trouble and then international travel and traveling abroad and their own really general terms.
But then, if you have something about traveling to bully, you can schedule that panto all of those boards once a day,
and then it can Luke back. But then you throw in some war of your content and then that schedules to different boards.
And it’s a snowball effect because, like Google, Pinterest does take some time to recognize who you are for your account to catch up to the algorithm.
So it could take 3 to 6 months to really start saying traffic, go to your website. But by that time you will have all of the content you need to be seen on Pinterest and start getting that traffic it builds on.
It felt awesome. Okay, so let me ask you one more question about that, just to make sure I’m fully understanding.
And so when you say posting eight times a day, it still could be individual pieces of content, your meaning,
like eight times a day. You should have something landing on a different board, absolutely. And if it’s your content,
as long as it’s a different pain than it could be to the same board, you just don’t want the same pin landing in the same board eight times a day.
And if I say you’re scheduling eight times a day, it could be what, especially when you’re first starting out.
It could be six of your pans and two of somebody else’s, too, because Pinterest favors people that share other people’s content at the It’s a shared platform,
and they want to make sure to that you’re not just hearing your content and that’s how you get re pins and you’re content shared as well.
Okay, cool. Thank you for clarifying that. Love that. So you can actually grab somebody else’s pin and put it in your scheduler.
Talk a little bit about you mentioned at a scheduling tool software tool while we’re on scheduling, you know,
before we started recording that you really like to use. So my favorite and they’re partnered with Pinterest is Tailwind.
You could integrate till one with penne trust, and there’s also different analytical tools that sync up with that.
You can sink it with Google Analytics, and you could basically see all of your pants and a big schedule.
So for those of you that use Instagram scheduler like plan early or something, you could see you’re a good kind of planned out and grades aren’t so important and Pinterest,
but you can school through and see. OK, how far my planned out do I have any duplicate pans like right back to back to back and then also with until when there’s something called tribes and they’re basically like Facebook groups four Tailwind or perp in trust,
and you shared your content there. And when you drawing to TRIBE, if you share something, you also have to repent something else.
So when you share to those tribes, people are almost required to share your content as well. So there’s different sharing analytical features,
and there’s something entailing called Smart Loop. So but Tillman has a free plan for up to 30 pay,
or up to 100 pens a month. But if you’re going to invest in something with Pinterest, I would recommend upgrading that because then you pretty much get unlimited pins per month,
and then they also have Smart loop feature, so you can basically set your your pants and a smart loop,
and it will schedule to your boards for you. And that’s why I recommend having general boards so that you can set up.
You’re scheduling on automation and have your pins circulate to those general boards without having pains go to Pier 11 boards.
That that makes sense. Yeah, it does make sense. Okay, I have questions about the type of content.
Question number one is how much content shows below the pin before it’s like a remora or linked to this site button about how much text copy is usually seen.
And how important is that content and copy in addition to the graphic pen. So the pen description is really important when it comes to the S e O.
Now you really only get about. I think it’s 250 characters that you get and in that and you kind of want you want to give a description with enough C words in there with maybe 2 to 3 hashtags,
you know, up branded one and some general ones know usually with instagram those hash times a really neat show with Pinterest.
You want them to be very general, and then you kind of want to call the action. You know,
you don’t have to have the link, but you want something like, you know, for more tips and tricks.
Visit my website, read my blog’s, but you don’t want anything like Click cheered. You know, by this,
because then you might get registered as Clickbait or spam. So you want to be very careful and Pinterest uses its own S C O.
So when you’re looking for key words for your pin descriptions, you want to use the search bar and Pinterest to find the key words you’re going to use to describe your content.
Oh, fascinating, Yes, totally a different strategy than we see on Instagram and those other places. Okay,
so this is where the search ability comes in is actually the copy underneath the pen because you can’t read copy from a graphic.
Super curious about that in Pedro’s does use Hashtags, so that’s just fascinating. This well, in the different hashtag strategies they aren’t is nish.
I think that’s fascinating. Okay, uh, let’s talk about video a little bit. Okay? Interest actually allows video.
What kind of video does Pinterest like in a wow? So unlike most of the platforms, Pinterest is vertical with video pens.
You see vertical pens or square almost like Instagram because there’s a really great instagram sharing capability to Pinterest now,
and that’s just developing just like the video pins. So it’s a relatively new feature. It’s in beta testing for scheduling per tail.
It and it’s really new. And it’s really exciting because with how visual Pinterest is, introducing video into that is going to be really,
really great for businesses to give a snapshot into their business without having to just create a graphic. And the videos and Pinterest are generally 20 seconds or less because you have a feed of all of these pans and because not many people are making video right now,
when you’re on your phone, when you’re scrolling through Pinterest, the videos are automatically playing, so they’ll catch your attention quicker.
So that’s why it’s so powerful to do it. And you could do something like a goby spark people.
You can use a snippet from your YouTube videos. You can get really, really creative when it comes to your video pins,
and it’s so new that people are just still developing the strategies for it. People use them a lot for Pinterest ads,
so Pinterest does have add capabilities. You know, a lot of people don’t ever use ads, but primarily they were used for ad,
and now you can use them just for organic reach. Supercool. Okay, what else should I be asking you that I didn’t ask you for those of our listeners that are interested in getting started to create more visibility with interest.
So when it comes to pen Trust s CEO is key because it is a search and we’ve kind of touched on it during this.
But I just want to make sure that if you’re going to go on Pinterest and you’re going to start implementing this as a strategy for marketing,
which I highly recommend for any content creators in any regard. But optimize your Pinterest description with keywords and give called actions your board’s make sure that you have each of your boards categorize and described with S E O using the S E o from Pinterest giving called actions to your websites because a lot of the time people get the board recommendations more than profile recommendations,
so they may land on your board before they ever land in your profile. So you want to make sure that you have a called action so they know you’re a business that you mean business and that you have awesome content to provide so and then the pen description.
Something s e o is key. If you’re gonna learn anything about Pinterest. Make sure that you know how to use keywords.
Awesome! Oh, my gosh. I have so much I want to talk to my team about right now that I just can’t wait to get off this interview and turn all this over to them.
Thank you so much for your time. Melanie, This was exciting. I love this. I love this show.
Led this interview. How can people find you so I actually have a free pace. But group where I go with a live weekly and interested Tuesday is that I just had one this morning and I share with the groom have use Pinterest Ansel content ideas.
I also offer free strategy calls for business owners that want some one on one. Just kind of wanna get pointed in the right direction.
And April I will give you my social media links so people can stay connected and I give a lot of probably way more pitch free paint.
Could trust advice that I said I love it. I love it. I love Yeah. We’ll make sure all the links to find you are in the show notes for this episode.
Thank you so much for your time. Melanie. I learned a lot today. I appreciate it. Thank you so much,
April. All right, you guys, that’s a wrap. Thank you so much for tuning into the show today for all the show notes.
And the resource is how to connect with Melanie Moore and how to get literally tons of free resource is to grow your business.
If you haven’t been to our podcast website lately, it’s pretty incredible. You can actually sort all of our shows by what you’re looking for,
whether it’s marketing. Brandon copyrighting online courses Landing your first client Every single thing you need. There are years and years of free resource is there,
so please use that website over at sweet life podcast dot com. And before we go, I want to make sure I’m giving a shout out to this week’s sweet life podcast Superfan.
This is 311 solution. You confined them by visiting 311 solution. C b d dot com there. Empowering healthier lifestyles.
Effective C B D supplements from lab tested hemp life in balance. And Shelly is one of our biggest fans of my Facebook page,
and she is always working hard to build her business, working hard to bring a quality product to market.
I know that based on the the D EMS that she sends me and she tunes in here to the sweet life podcast.
And so we wanted to give her a shout out. Shelly, thank you so much for listening to the show.
Thank you for being a super fan of this show and really creating an awesome, brisk business bringing amazing products to the people that need them.
So go over and give Shelly a shout out at 311 solution CBD. She also could be found on Instagram at 311 solution CBD and on Facebook at 311 solution.
All right, you guys have an awesome day. I’ll talk to you soon.
That’s all folks!

Episode 164: Is Your Online Marketing Failing? Here are 5 Solutions You Can Count On – with April Beach

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast April Beach

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Who This Episode is Great For:

  1. Those of you who are doing everything you’re told and your online marketing still isn’t working
  2. Anyone in any phase of my Lifestyle Business Roadmap

Show Highlights:

  • How online marketing sales have changed over the past few years
  • The story of how Facebook completely stonewalled my recent marketing efforts
  • The five strategies you can implement to continue to grow your list and business and increase your sales when all else fails

Take Action with Episode Bonuses:

Join the SweetLife Facebook Community

Resources Mentioned:

My Business Website

Want to become an Affiliate of our company? Email hello@sweetlifeco.com

Speakers Summit Mastermind™

Help a Report Out (HARO)

Kristen Foust on Instagram

Every Day I’m Preppin’

SweetLife Entrepreneur Podcast | Episode 133: The Power Of Superfans: How to Create A Community Of Superfans Who Love And Follow You Forever – with Pat Flynn

April Beach on Instagram

Full Show Transcript:

 

you’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probe age. You guys coming to you from a very cold boulder, Colorado. I’m holding my cup of tea recording this episode for you and I’m hoping that my voice holds out. I have the whole Debra Winger thing going on here, but don’t quite sound as sexy as she does. And I have a very special message that I want to share. This is actually one that I fit into our podcast content editorial calendar because of the fact that it’s come up so much,
I think it’s really important for us to talk about today. We are talking about what to do when everything that you’ve been told to dio to market your business online is totally failing. So this means the Facebook ads, the instagram, you know, strategies and the filters and that perfect feeds and a certain number of stories you post each day and how to go live on LinkedIn. All the things you’ve been told or what you quote unquote are supposed to do to grow your business and grow your list. What do you do when they aren’t working?
This is something that we’re hearing more and more about. So the funnels that we had used and that had worked so well to grow lists from 2015 to 2018 they aren’t working so hot anymore until the online strategies of business development aren’t working for everybody the way that they used Thio. And I want to talk about that because I’m a business coach. I coach you guys and I have a lot of women out there that are doing everything quote unquote right, right. You know, on my team of experts, I have Facebook experts and Instagram experts.
And finally, a couple of weeks ago, we hit a total brick wall within my own business. So I’m gonna tell you this story. And this is why it really triggered me to record this episode for you about two weeks ago when we were going through to trigger our ads to Sweet Life Launch, which is my business launch and development program that was open for a short period of time. All of our ads were stonewalled by Facebook, which means Facebook rejected all of our ads. Now these were the same ads.
We ran over and over again, and we went through the language making sure that language was right. We went through making sure there weren’t any, like, shifty promises and the ads, you know, because Facebook’s always, you know, trying to be careful for what businesses advertise on their platform anyway. Total Stonewall meeting with Facebook’s Our Facebook ads strategist who is a Facebook at expert. She has been for years. She met, looked with Facebook anyway. Our ads were not approved in. Facebook has now been putting a crunch on ad strategies for business coaches,
and we’re starting to feel the effects of some of the online marketing strategies that works really, really well for years and years. What happens is when a lot of people start doing them. They stopped working so well and we hit that brick wall. I know that this is also happening in and many of your businesses to Maybe you’re following an instagram strategy or a social media planning calendar. That somebody you said would be perfect and it’s not working for you. So whether you have your Facebook ads disapproved for literally no reason like we did.
Your funnels aren’t attracting buyers anymore. You’re wasting hours a week on instagram and not gaining any following all. Maybe you host live webinars. Maybe you’re using a live weapon, our strategy to sell into your programs. Maybe that’s just not working. And I’m not saying these aren’t working for everybody is a matter of fact. A client of mine just hosted live Webinars and sold her online course for $40,000 for the first launch. I mean, some of these strategies are working great, but for many of you, they aren’t.
So this is the podcast to be listening to If everything that everybody said to d’oh you have done and your list still isn’t growing, your business isn’t booming. You aren’t gaining your followers today.
We’re gonna talk about how to market your business when all else fails. So this particular episode is for those of you guys who are in all phases of my lifestyle entrepreneur road map.
If you aren’t sure where you are, just pause this episode really quick in just text to the number 31996 and you’re gonna wanna text to the word sweet life one word and that I’ll just shoot you a link.
You can take a small short assessment, and it’ll tell you exactly where you are on the road map to build the lifestyle business of your dreams and give you steps and thinks you should be working on based on where you are.
So this particular episode, this online marketing kind of fail. This is not just for new entrepreneurs. This is affecting established businesses,
too. So this particular episode is for every single phase of my lifestyle. Entrepreneur of my lifestyle, business,
road map. And today we’re gonna talk about five different strategies that you can d’oh to continue to grow your list and grow your business and increase your sales when all else fails.
All the show notes for this episode can be found it. Sweet life podcast dot com forward slash 1 64 and stick around to the end of this episode.
We are featuring a podcast listener and their business every single week in promoting you guys out on instagram and on Facebook and helping your business gain more traction and get more attention to so stick around at the end of the show,
and you will get to know our featured listener and for you to be our featured listener. Simply go to sweet life podcast dot com and applied to be the next featured business and listener.
Okay, let’s go ahead and dive in. Okay, Step number one. The first thing to do when all of your online marketing fails.
The first thing to do is to create a network of online businesses just like yours. That you resonate with you are,
may be in the same place, is they are in their business, and I want you to create personal relationships with them.
Here is the purpose of doing this when you create a collective of businesses that don’t do the same thing.
Just a collective of like minded women in a small group, not 20 not 30 were like talking five or seven,
and you create this collective of businesses that you take the time to get to know each other. You take the time to get to know the service’s of one another.
You actually go through almost like a mini brand training with each other, and you create this collective of promoting each other’s businesses connecting with each other online and offline.
That is gold to your company. So here’s your homework for this. This is picking five people from online.
I want you to pick five different businesses online. You can connect with them from Facebook groups that you’re in.
As long as that, of course, abide by those group rules. You can connect with him on Instagram,
and I want you to reach out to all of them individually at first and just say this. Say,
Hey, listen, I’m working hard to get my business noticed. I see you’re working hard to get your business noticed us?
Well, I’d love to get to know you create a relationship with you. Hey, let’s have coffee sometime and you get to know them.
You get to know what they’re doing. This takes time. Folks like there is no press easy button here.
And that’s the downfall of online marketing. Is it? For so many years, you’ve been told that this is an easy button with online marketing that you could just hit,
and all these people are just going to show up at your front doorstep. It doesn’t always work that way,
and it’s starting to work that way less unless, Okay, so taking time to have coffee with another business virtually online,
even just for 15 minutes and getting to know each other is a powerful first step. My recommendation is to do this with five different businesses individually,
and then set up a zoom virtual coffee date with these five ladies once a month. It’s like your own little mini mastermind,
and what happens is you become part of each other’s lives and you know about each other’s businesses in those relationships grow and you’ll start commenting on their things on social media,
and they’ll start commenting on yours. They’ll refer other people to your business, and vice versa. That is number one.
Best way is to create a community. Collective was just you and a few other girls Where you connect with these relationships are the ones that build profitable,
powerful, multi six figure cos they start like this. They start by a hanging out and having coffee together,
being intentional. So that is step number one Stuff member. Choose to be common affiliate be becoming an affiliate means that your company sells another company’s program,
service’s or products. This is a really great way to number one, have your business seen as a leader and a somebody that sells really resourceful products,
even if they aren’t your own number two. To be able to build a relationship with other businesses by supporting them to sell their programs and offers and number three by increasing your sales when you become an affiliate,
you automatically are brought into a collective of other affiliates that air promoting the same program the same offer. This is an amazing way to network to share what you do and,
of course, to make more online friends when you make more online friends and you have more people on your side where people are going to share your business and recommend you that other people,
these personal relationships supersede anything that you can d’oh even any video strategy that you could do and just put out there to a cold audience.
Having somebody personally recommend you will always come first. Now the question is, you ask, how do I become an affiliate now?
This isn’t a whole training on how to become an affiliate for somebody else, but let’s just cut to the chase.
If you see a program that you like and you’d like to sell, reach out to the person personally in just a Hey,
listen, I love what you’re doing. I believe in what you’re doing. Can I help you sell it?
Can I be an affiliate? One of my favorite programs that I sell for somebody else’s for my friends.
Selena Sue. She has a program called Impacting Millions. It teaches people how to get press and how to get media exposure in your business,
and I love this program. I’ve been affiliate for her for years now, and the way I did that was reaching out to her and say,
Hey, I love what you’re doing. This is not something I currently coach my clients on. I would love to sell yours.
How can I help you? How can I be of service to you? And being part of Selena’s affiliate program has actually introduced me to some of my very best online business Girlfriends is a matter of fact two of them.
I just hosted a virtual weekend summit with These are great relationships, and what it’s gonna do is it’s gonna open the doors from our networking for you,
but it’s also going to increase your sales and get your company more exposure. So that is step number 27 of our three is did speak.
I’ve been talking about speaking here on this podcast. This is really important for you getting up personally in front of an audience in actually speaking to them,
teaching a training or sharing your message. It doesn’t matter if it’s 10 people or 100 people or 1000 people.
When you do that, you connect one on one with that listener in a way that you can’t any other way through online marketing.
And so I encourage you to speak to get out there. And your action item on this is just to make a list of five different events that you would like to speak at this year.
Five different places. They’re your wish list of events. Where do you want to talk? Is there a woman Start up summit or Health and Fitness Summit and go and start doing your research.
Figure out how you can apply for that and start getting your ducks in a row to do that. We talk all the time here on this podcast and that actual summit that I hosted with to my Only Girlfriends was called Speaker Summit That teaches you how to have resource is to book yourself to speak so you can always cruise back to sweet life co dot com.
My Web site and find resource is to learn how to speak their a swell. But your action item on this is just to make a list of five different dream stages that you would like to speak on.
They don’t have to be big. The small ones in the local communities in your small towns are the ones that build almost just is powerful relationships,
as if you’re a big keynote speaker for an annual event. So Number four is to get press and media attention.
Now. Press and media attention doesn’t automatically create a marketing funnel for you. However, when you get press and media attention,
what it does is it attracts high quality businesses and high quality buyers to you. This is an alternative to our traditional online marketing standards that we’ve been talking about because it’s a way that immediately elevates you as an expert.
Whether you’re contributing to an article whether you’re quoted in the magazine, whatever it may be getting press and media attention for your business will always supersede your authority above any sort of personal self posting you’re doing across social media.
It’s having an endorsement from a media outlets saying, Hey, look, this chick knows when she’s talking about,
and we’re gonna quote her in this article because we think she’s a reputable source. So having that sort of exposure is going to attract other businesses to you,
and it’s going to then attract marketing to you. So it’s one of those things that you can do that’s free.
You don’t have to pay for it other than sweat equity to submit your article to be featured in a publication.
And one of the resource is we’ve shared here for the last couple of years on this podcast on how to get awesome Press and media attention is a resource called Help a Reporter out.
It’s a free resource where you can submit yourself as an expert and we’ll go ahead and make sure we put a link to help a reporter out,
also known as Harrow in the show notes for this episode for You and then the fifth strategy to grow your business,
aside from online marketing, is to host offline events. This could be a meet up, but you d’oh!
It could be a luncheon for local businesses in your area. There doesn’t have to be a cost to it.
It’s just hosting an event to bring people closer to you within your community that are your perspective clients. Even if you have an online business,
it’s important to know that the best, most lucrative relationships are built face to face. So those followers those super fans is Pat.
Fling calls them those first followers of a new service or a new offer. You can get those source first followers locally,
and then they become your biggest online cheerleaders. They become your biggest fans. I still remember when I was launching this podcast and we had a big,
huge podcast launch team that was so grateful for all of the women, all the people that took part in it.
But the majority of listeners on that podcast launch team. We’re from Colorado. They were friends and friends of friends,
and it was really awesome. There were hundreds of people that flooded the airwaves sharing this podcast, but that started local and it catapulted us to the top female entrepreneur podcast for over 20 weeks straight.
So I want you to know that those things work. Don’t just cut to the chase and go immediately to these online relationships.
And if you find yourself where you’re wondering, why isn’t this working? What is wrong with me? I’ve done every single Facebook live video that so and so told me to do,
and I’m showing up on Instagram. Story is the exact amount of time and hosting I G lives in posting interesting,
thought provoking articles that start with stories on LinkedIn and nothing is working. The most important thing to do is keep it up.
Don’t quit doing those things. Your online presence is incredibly important. I’m not saying that you should quit those things.
What I am telling you is that there are other ways to grow your business through what we call grassroots marketing that are going to build deep relationships with people that I love you and become your greatest cheerleaders.
And they aren’t always this shiny, perfect online funnel like you’re told that they are until this podcast is to let you know there’s nothing wrong with you.
You’re not doing anything wrong. You’re trying hard, you’re building your business and you’re trying to get attention into spread out and to rise above the noise.
And I love you for that. And that’s so awesome. That’s why you’re sitting here listening to this podcast episode.
But these five ways. If you just pick a couple of them, even two of these to incorporate in your marketing strategy,
I promise you they will make a world of difference. They’re not an easy but you do not get to push a button,
and these things were being instantly done for you. These things take work, but because they take work,
an intention and personal connection, that’s why they’re so powerful and they can grow your business in exponential ways.
So let’s go back over these five solutions when all of your online marketing his head a brick wall number one is defined.
Five people online from Facebook groups, or INSTAGRAM, schedule coffee dates with them, inform a little mastermind collective,
get to know each other and support each other in each other’s business is Number two is to become an affiliate in to sell somebody else’s service.
Is you can always email us if you’d like to be humming affiliate of our business programs. Simply shoot an email toe Hello at sweet life co dot com and say,
I want to be an affiliate. We would love to have you, and I know there are many other businesses out there that would love to have you sharing their offers.
And service is number three is speak. What I talked about on today’s show is really to speak. Live face to face events.
Start booking yourself on five stages, whether their local or bigger, buying five stages this year. Get out their share your message and connect with people.
Face to Face Number four is to get press and media attention, and I promised you will put the link to the heros so that you can submit yourself as an expert in the show notes for this episode.
And Number five is to host offline events hosting offline events. Coffee dates face to face strategy sessions. Maybe you host a community event where you pour into your community and you volunteer your service.
Is that you? D’oh for another group of women once every quarter. Believe me, that will give you strides of an advantage over your competitors by giving first,
we really believe that the best way to build your business is always by giving first, and that is one key way to do it.
All right, you guys help. You found this podcast helpful. If you did, I would love it.
I would really appreciate it if you’d just up arrow and sure this podcast with your friends. You can actually share this podcast directly from Spotify and Pandora to instagram.
And if you aren’t yet, please follow us at Sweet Life Podcast or at sweet Life Entrepreneur on Instagram.
I would love to chat with you over there. Okay, Your show notes for this episode can be found by visiting Suite Life podcast dot com forward slash 1 64 in today’s feature podcast Listener is Kristen Fast.
Kristen is the founder of Everyday I’m prep in dot com. She is a health coach that helps Mama’s ditch the fad diets and take control of their help,
including hormone mindset. And she just has some really cool stuff. Follow her over on Instagram at Kristen G.
Faust, and every day I’m prepping. She adjusted a really cool I g TV video, which I love about weight loss,
ms. So let’s give her a high five and go over and follow her on her business. She’s doing great stuff over there.
We’ll make sure there’s a link to Kristen’s business in the show notes for this episode as well. Okay,
you guys help. You found this helpful. I just want to encourage you that if you feel like you’re doing all the things and nothing’s working,
just keep going. Start using some of these off the side grassroots marketing strategies because these are the ways that we have built business for a long time before anybody invented shiny online funnels.
And let me tell you something. They work, all right, you guys have an awesome week and I’ll talk to you again soon.
Bye for now.

Episode 163: Should Events Be Part Of Your Business Offering? – with April Beach and Jenn Murray

This episode is for those in Phase 1 – 2 – 3 – 4 – 5 of the Lifestyle Entrepreneur Roadmap™ Not sure what Phase your business is in?

 

Who This Episode is Great For:

  1. Entrepreneurs who are intimidated by the idea of hosting events
  2. Entrepreneurs who are considering offering events
  3. Entrepreneurs who have never considered hosting events before
  4. Those ready to scale with an established business

Show Highlights:

  • Four event-hosting myths and a breakdown of the truth
  • How much notice you should give your audience about your events so they have time to plan
  • The two things I was nervous to do during my own events that really paid off

About the Guest:

Jenn Murray is an Event Planner who helps online entrepreneurs plan in-person events (such as workshops, retreats, masterminds, and conferences) that meet their business goals and cultivate long-term relationships. Her clients range from entrepreneurs who are just branching out into events to those with 6-figure businesses.
 
Entrepreneurs come to Jenn wanting to: take their event from idea to reality; cultivate authentic, vital connections with their attendees; execute an event that’s aligned with their unique brand and messaging; and add events to their long-term business model in a profitable way.

Take Action with Episode Bonuses:

Download Jenn’s FREE PDF | This Super Secret Hack Will Greatly Simplify Your Event Planning Process (Scroll to the bottom of the page.)

Take a screenshot of this episode, share it on Instagram and tag myself (@sweetlife_entrepreneur) and Jenn (@relate.escape)

Download Jenn’s free “Super Secret Hack” to jumpstart your event planning with clarity, focus, and a lot less stress!

Resources Mentioned:

Jenn Murray’s Website Jenn Murray on Facebook Jenn Murray on LinkedIn

Join SweetLife Launch™ – 90 Day Business Launch Mentorship

Events for Entrepreneurs: The Podcast

 

you’re listening to the sweet life entrepreneur podcast Simplified strategies to grow your service business and launch a life you love faster with business, mental and entrepreneur activator a probe Age Hey, guys, Thanks for being here and tuning into the show. I’m April Beach and I’m glad to be talking to you today we are at episode number 163 and you are listening to the Sweet Life Entrepreneur A podcast now, also on Pandora. I always forget to announce that to you guys. I’m super excited that we’re part of the Pandora family of podcast.
We’ve actually been there for at least six months. And, um, I want to make sure that, you know, if you’re a Pandora listener, you can also catch the show on Pandora. Today we’re driving into talking about events to connect deeper with your audience in to grow your business. But before we do that, let me go ahead and take care of a few little reminders that actually make me so excited to Dio. The first thing is I want to give a shout out to our listener of the week,
Laurie Evans, wherever you are. Thank you. So much for leaving this review on Apple. And this is what Laurie says about this show. It’s just what I was looking for. I’m a long time podcast listener, but honestly, a little burned out. A metal new level in my business, in the usual podcasts are not cutting it. I’ve been on the search for podcast that actually bring value and push me to step it up to the next level. The sweet life entrepreneur podcast, is it?
I’m obsessed. So, Laurie, wherever you are, thank you so much for being a listener. Thank you for your review. I would love to promote your business and so hit me up on Instagram over at sweet Life. Entrepreneur, send me a message and just say, Hey, Abra, I’m Laurie. And, um, we’ll make sure to share your business out with our followers. Okay, Next item of quote unquote actual business, which is exciting, is sweet. Life launches open. Sweet life Launch is my signature business launch development and mentorship program.
And it is a place for you to be if you are ready to stop guessing and to know exactly what to do, tow, launch and grow your business with support access to my business, launch training’s courses, programs and private coaching and feedback on your work every single month directly from me. Sweet left launches only open a couple of times a year. So if you are ready for this level of business launch p